Only this pageAll pages
Powered by GitBook
1 of 78

Aphex Help

Loading...

Planner

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Integrations & API

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Organisations & Projects

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Account & Task Properties

Loading...

Loading...

Troubleshooting

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Authentication

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Policies

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

How can we help?

Account & Task PropertiesTroubleshootingAuthenticationPolicies

Planner

Organisations & Projects

Integrations & APIs

Cover
Cover
Cover

How is PPC calculated?

If you've downloaded one of our free Power BI dashboards, you may have questions about how the PPC (Percent Plan Complete) is being calculated.

What is PPC?

PPC shows you what percentage of your planned work actually got done between two dates (usually last week and this week). There are two ways to measure it:

PPC (Task Day)

This method looks at how many work days you completed as planned.

Example:

Let's say you have three tasks:

  • Task A: 3-day task, all days planned for the reference week

  • Task B: 2-day task, all days planned for the reference week

  • Task C: 4-day task, with 2 days planned for the reference week and 2 days the following week

What actually happened:

  • Task A: ✓ All 3 days completed during the reference week

  • Task B: ✗ Slipped—only 1 of the 2 planned days completed during the reference week

  • Task C: ✗ Slipped—only 1 of the 2 planned days completed during the reference week

How we calculate it:

  • Task A: 3 / 3 days = 100% PPC

  • Task B: 1 / 2 days = 50% PPC

  • Task C: 1 / 2 days = 50% PPC

Total PPC = Average(100%, 50%, 50%) = 66%

PPC (Task)

This method only counts tasks that were completely finished on schedule.

Example:

Let's say you have three tasks:

  • Task A: Final day planned to occur in the reference week

  • Task B: Final day planned to occur in the reference week

  • Task C: Final day planned to occur in the reference week

What actually happened:

  • Task A: ✓ Final day of task occurred in the reference week

  • Task B: ✗ Slipped—final day pushed to the following week

  • Task C: ✓ Final day of task occurred in the reference week

How we calculate it:

  • Task A: Completed = 100% PPC

  • Task B: Not Completed = 0% PPC

  • Task C: Completed = 100% PPC

Total PPC = Average(100%, 0%, 100%) = 66%

APIs

Master Schedules

Tasks

Project Tasks are the core object of Aphex Plan - this endpoint will return realtime Task data for a provided query.

Get Tasks

Use this endpoint to query Tasks on a project.

Plan APIs

This feature is in a closed beta phase and is available upon request only for Enterprise partners. Talk to us to learn more.

Overview

The foundation of the Aphex Planner data model are projects and tasks. Tasks reflect planned work and crucial properties such as subcontractors or shifts.

For customers and partners wanting to build external or internal applications and workflows on top of planned tasks, we provide a broad set of endpoints that give access to real-time data from a Plan workspace.

Typically use cases for these endpoints include;

Authentication

To generate a session token, you must provide a valid Client ID and Client Secret.

While in closed beta, you can obtain your API keys by contacting our Customer Success team.

Generate Token

Use this endpoint to generate a temporary Access Token

External Map Layers

Terms & Agreements

Terms of Service
Data Processing Addendum
Subprocessors List
Service Level Agreement

Subprocessors List

Our list of subprocessors is now hosted on our Trust Centre.

View our latest list here

Third-party platforms and products building integrations to Aphex

  • Internal customer teams using planned tasks as the trigger for internal apps or workflows

  • Querying the Plan APIs

    Our APIs follow the essence of REST and all queries must be made via HTTPS to pass the endpoint security rules.

    Endpoints query rules and response structure can be accessed from the following page;

    Revoke Token

    Use this endpoint to revoke a previously generated Access token

    Asta Powerproject

    Primavera P6

    Microsoft Project

    ArcGIS

    Civillo

    Sensat

    Propeller

    Nearmap

    MetroMap

    DroneDeploy

    Power BI

    By connecting Aphex to Power BI, you can use your weekly Published Plans to create consistent, reliable dashboards without adding extra steps. The data’s already there, this is just a way to make use of it.

    This page pulls together everything you need to get set up, along with links to downloadable reporting templates and supporting docs.

    Connecting Aphex to Power BI

    Each project can generate its own secure connection to Power BI, giving teams full control over whether and when to enable reporting.

    You can enable the Power BI data source from the project’s Integrations menu, then generate a token and URL to connect to Power BI.

    Set Up Guide

    About the API & Data Model

    The Power BI API is based entirely on Published Versions, meaning your reports are built from official, reviewed snapshots of the plan. Because these versions are already created as part of your planning cycle, there’s no extra work required.

    You get access to everything: task details, PPC, variance, subcontractor activity, who’s made ready, delays & even milestone movement.

    Because it’s versioned data, it’s easy to track changes over time.

    Free Power BI Templates

    To help you get started quickly, we’ve created a set of plug-and-play Power BI templates. These dashboards work with your weekly Published Pan data and cover common use cases like PPC tracking, delay trends, and subcontractor performance.

    Once you’ve connected your project, you can also schedule a refresh so the dashboards pull in each week’s data automatically after a new version is published. Most teams choose to align this with their weekly planning cycle.

    Templates are free to download and easy to customise.

    Policies

    How do I set up MFA?

    To add an extra layer of protection to your account, you can enable Multi-Factor Authentication.

    Click your User Avatar in the top right corner

    Hit Account & Preferences

    Scroll down to the bottom of Account Settings & Click Add MFA

    On your chosen authenticator app, scan the QR code

    Enter the verification code shown on your authenticator app to complete MFA setup

    Project Assets

    Project assets are the defined lists of objects that can be attached to tasks within a project. You can query these assets to assist in constructing more precise Task queries.

    Get Users

    Use this endpoint to query the list of Users on a project.

    Get Subcontractors

    Use this endpoint to query the list of Subcontractors on a project.

    Get Folders

    Use this endpoint to query the tree of Folders on a project.

    Get Packages

    Use this endpoint to query the list of Packages on a project.

    Get Calendars

    Use this endpoint to query the list of Calendars on a project.

    Get Locations

    Use this endpoint to query the list of Locations on a project.

    Compliance and Certification

    At Aphex, we take the security of our customer's data very seriously. That's why we hold industry standard certifications: ISO27001 and Cyber Essentials Plus.

    ISO27001

    ISO27001 is an international standard for information security management systems. It ensures that our company has implemented appropriate measures to protect the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of our customer's data.

    Cyber Essentials Plus

    Cyber Essentials Plus is a UK government-backed certification that demonstrates our commitment to protecting against common cyber attacks. It involves a rigorous independent assessment of our security controls, including firewalls, access controls, and malware protection.

    We are committed to maintaining these certifications and continuing to prioritize the security of our customer's data.

    Getting Started

    First time planning in Aphex? Start here

    Getting Around


    Switch between Views to see the Plan the way you need - this could be anything from your own Tasks, to upcoming Milestones, or Tasks with delays from a specific subcontractor over the last 7 days. Each View lets you filter, group, and set a date range that fits.

    The main navigation controls live at the top of the page:

    Features

    List

    Who can use this feature?

    All Project Users have access to List Views on both Web and the Mobile App

    List View turns your Gantt into a daily to-do list. See what’s on for today, or the next day - filter by properties like Supervisor (Assignee) or Location, and report progress with a Thumbs-Up or Thumbs-Down.

    Tags

    Who can use this feature?

    Task Owners, Assignees and Admin users can add Tags to Tasks.


    All Project Users can create and edit Tags by default. This can be changed to Admins only in the Project Settings.

    Tags give you a way to label Tasks with anything that matters to your team, from safety and risk, to key priorities, review flags, or anything else. They’re multi-select, fully custom, and can be used to filter views to suit different meetings, roles, or priorities.

    Troubleshooting Your SAML Single Sign-On Setup

    Note: SAML SSO is available on Enterprise plans only.

    SAML Single Sign-On (SSO) integration with Aphex streamlines access management by allowing your team to use existing identity provider credentials. If you're experiencing issues with your SSO configuration or want to prevent common problems, this guide covers the most frequent issues and their resolutions.

    For step-by-step setup instructions, see our guide.

    How to login with SSO

    A guide for users in accessing their accounts when Enterprise SSO is enabled

    Who can use this feature? SSO is available on Enterprise plans Your system Administrator will have to enable SAML SSO for your primary email domain.

    Single Sign On (SSO) allows users to log into many applications or websites using an identity provider. Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) is a security standard for managing authentication and access.

    In a SAML SSO set-up, the identity provider manages the organisation's user accounts and credentials. The service provider (Aphex) is the app or website that provides services to the user or organisation.

    When using SAML SSO, members are forced to log in to their Aphex account using the organisation's identity provider.

    Acceptable Use Policy

    This Acceptable Use Policy applies to the Services as defined in the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions. In the event of any inconsistency between this Acceptable Use Policy and the terms of the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions, the terms of the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions take priority.

    Unless the context requires otherwise, defined terms in the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions have the same meaning in this Acceptable Use Policy.

    To keep the Services running safely and smoothly, we need our users to agree not to misuse them. Specifically, you agree not to:

    (a) probe, scan, or test the vulnerability of any system or network used with the Services;

    (b) tamper with, reverse engineer or hack the Services, circumvent any security or authentication measures of the Services or attempt to gain unauthorized access to the Services (or any portion thereof) or related systems, networks or data;

    (c) modify or disable the Services or use the Services in any manner that interferes with or disrupts the integrity or performance of the Services or related systems, network or data;

    (d) access or search the Services by any means other than our publicly supported interfaces, or copy, distribute, or disclose any part of the Service in any medium, including without limitation by any automated or non-automated "scraping";

    Service Level Agreement

    1. Overview

    1.1 This Service Level Agreement applies to the Platform as defined in the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions (the Target Services). In the event of any inconsistency between this Service Level Agreement (SLA) and the terms of the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions, the terms of the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions will take priority.

    How do I reset my Password?

    Can't remember your password? We've gotcha! Follow the simple steps below to reset your Aphex account password.

    First head to the Aphex login page and enter your email and hit continue

    Next, click Forgot Password then Reset your Password

    Enter your email and select Send reset instructions

    On the reset email, click Reset Password

    (e) overwhelm or attempt to overwhelm our infrastructure by imposing an unreasonably large load on the Services that consume extraordinary resources, such as by: (i) using "robots," "spiders," "offline readers" or other automated systems to send more request messages to our servers than a human could reasonably send in the same period of time using a normal browser; or (ii) going far beyond the use parameters for any given Service as described in its corresponding documentation;

    (f) solicit any users of our Services for commercial purposes;

    (g) misrepresent yourself (or any other user) or disguise the origin of any data, content or other information you submit (including by "spoofing", "phishing", manipulating headers or other identifiers, impersonating anyone else, or falsely implying any sponsorship or association with us or any third party) or access the Services via another user's account without their permission;

    (h) use the Services for any illegal purpose or in violation of any laws (including without limitation data, privacy and export control laws);

    (i) use the Services to violate the privacy of others, or to collect or gather other users' personal information (including account information) from our Services;

    (j) submit (or post, upload, share or otherwise provide) data, content or other information that (i) infringes our or a third party's intellectual property, privacy or other rights or that you don't have the right to submit (including confidential or personal information you are not authorized to disclose); (ii) that is deceptive, fraudulent, illegal, obscene, defamatory, libelous, threatening, harmful to minors, pornographic, indecent, harassing, hateful, religiously, racially or ethnically offensive, that encourages illegal or tortious conduct or that is otherwise inappropriate in our reasonable opinion; (iii) contains viruses, bots, worms, scripting exploits or other similar materials; or (iv) that could otherwise cause damage to us or any third party;

    (k) promote or advertise products or services other than your own without appropriate authorisation;

    (l) use meta tags or any other "hidden text" including our or our suppliers' product names or trademarks;

    (m) permit or encourage anyone else to commit any of the actions above; and

    (n) otherwise perform or assist any unauthorised act or action that may cause any harm or disrepute to our brand or reputation.

    Without affecting any other remedies available to us, we may, without recourse, permanently or temporarily terminate or suspend your account or access to the Services without notice or liability if we (in our sole discretion) determine that you have violated this Acceptable Use Policy.

    Authentication

    Project Assets

    Tasks

    Published Plan API
    Resource Hub
    How the Project Reporting Suite works
    Acceptable Use Policy
    Privacy Policy
    Cookie Policy
    Fair Billing Policy
    Support Policy
    2. Definitions

    2.1 Unless the context requires otherwise, defined terms in the Aphex Platform Terms & Conditions have the same meaning in this Service Level Agreement and the following definitions also apply:

    Availability means:

    Availability Target means 99.5% per month.

    Downtime means the number of whole minutes within the relevant calendar month that you are unable to access the Target Services. Downtime does not include the time that the Target Services are unavailable due to Scheduled Downtime, Emergency Maintenance or an Excluded Event.

    Emergency Maintenance means any maintenance deemed necessary to protect and maintain the security or integrity of the Target Services.

    Excluded Event means each of the following:

    (a) failure caused by any software, hardware or other components outside our network or not provided by us;

    (b) any trial or beta software, including any Experimental Services (being any software released to the market for testing and feedback);

    (c) any event or circumstance which is beyond our reasonable control including but not limited to, acts of God including fire, hurricane, typhoon, earthquake, landslide, tsunami, mudslide or other catastrophic natural disaster, civil riot, civil rebellion, revolution, terrorism, insurrection, militarily usurped power, act of sabotage, act of a public enemy, war (whether declared or not) or other like hostilities, ionising radiation, contamination by radioactivity, nuclear, chemical or biological contamination, any widespread illness, quarantine or government sanctioned ordinance or shutdown, pandemic (including COVID-19 and any variations or mutations to this disease or illness) or epidemic.

    (d) any resource reduction directed and approved in writing by you despite our written notice that such reduction may result in that failure or less than optimum performance;

    (e) any modification, revision, variation, translation or alteration of the Target Services that is not authorised by us;

    (f) failure of access circuits to our network or upstream providers, unless such failure is caused solely by us;

    (g) your acts or omissions (or the acts or omissions of others engaged or authorised by you), including, without limitation, any negligence, wilful misconduct, or use of the Target Services in breach of the Aphex Platform Terms & Conditions;

    (h) outages elsewhere on the internet that hinder or prevent access to the Target Services or your Account;

    (i) failure caused by Your Data;

    (j) failure caused by third party products or services; and

    (k) IP address blacklisting by third parties.

    Failure means that we have failed to achieve the Availability Target for the Target Services in the relevant calendar month.

    Scheduled Downtime means planned maintenance or upgrades to the Target Services in accordance with advance notice provided to you by us.

    Service Credit means any fee rebate or refund, as determined in accordance with clause 3.3.

    Service Credit Request has the meaning given to it in clause 3.2.

    Total Minutes means the total number of minutes in the relevant calendar month.

    3. Service Level - Availability

    3.1 During the term of the Aphex Platform Terms & Conditions, we will use commercially reasonable efforts to provide you with the Target Services in accordance with the Availability Target.

    3.2 Where we fail to meet the Availability Target in 2 consecutive calendar months, you may terminate the Aphex Platform Terms & Conditions and cancel your Account with us by giving us 30 days’ written notice. In such event, we agree to provide you with a prorata refund of any Fees paid in advance by you to us.

    3.3 You acknowledge and agree that the remedy set out at clause 3.2 will be your sole and exclusive remedy against us arising from or in connection with our failure to meet the Availability Target.

    (Total Minutes - Downtime) / Total Minutes × 100

    Add and remove Filters to reveal relevant Tasks

  • Change the Date Range to view Tasks occurring within a particular timeframe

  • Update the Grouping to change how Tasks are organised in your Plan

  • Swap between the Gantt, Map, List & Board View tabs that are open at the top of your page

  • Create your own Views for personal use, or to share with your Team

  • Full How-To Guides

    Learn to navigate the four different View types;

    Gantt Board Map List

    See how to Create your Own View or Open a Shared View to see Views your Team have already built

    Creating & Editing Tasks


    Next up: start adding new Tasks or editing existing ones.

    • Add Tasks inside your project's existing structure by clicking Add Task

    • Open the Column Picker to view and edit Task information

    • Select tasks and use the multi-select to apply edits in bulk

    • Draw links between your Tasks to create relationships

    • Drag Task Bars to adjust dates & sequences

    Full How-To Guides

    See how to Create Tasks or how to Edit Tasks

    Experiment with adding your Tasks to the Map or Allocating Materials

    Learn to Create Relationship Links

    Understand how Task Permissions impact what you can edit

    Ready your Plan


    Once your Tasks are up to date, mark your plan as ‘Ready’ to show your team it’s good to go for the Weekly Published Version.

    • Check the upcoming deadline in the top-right for when you have to be Ready by. Typically this will line up with your existing short-term planning cycle.

    • Resolve any Missing Data, Clashes or Overdue Blockers

    • Once you're happy to be accountable for your plan, you can mark your Tasks as

    Full How-To Guides

    What is a Weekly Published Version

    Learn how to complete Missing Data and Resolve Clashes

    See how to Ready your Plan

    Share your Plan


    Once your Admin publishes the official Weekly Version, you can share the plan with anyone, even if they’re not using Aphex.

    • Copy the public URL to your Weekly Version and share with non-Aphex users

    • Open and select Print View to generate a PDF

    • Under View Options you'll also find Export Tasks to CSV

    Full How-To Guides

    Learn how to Share an Interactive Copy of the plan with anyone

    See how to Print your Plan

    Check out how to export your Tasks to CSV and Resource Demand to CSV

    Record and Track Progress


    As work proceeds and the plan changes, keep your tasks up to date by recording delays and improvements.

    • Extend your Promised Tasks or use the Thumbs Down to log a delay

    • Use the Thumbs Up to log an Improvement or On Schedule

    • Mark Tasks as completed by changing the Status to

    • Open to turn on the Baseline to compare the live plan to previous weeks

    Full How-To Guides

    Start to Record Delays and Improvements

    See how to Mark Tasks as Done

    Learn to compare the plan by Turning on a Baseline

    Organise your List View

    Use grouping to organise your Task List around what matters most. Sort Tasks by the team doing the work, where they're happening or how they're tracking.

    To change how List is organised:

    • Click in the top left

    • Select from Subcontractor, Owner, Schedule, Location, Package, Folder or Shift

    • Tasks and Groups will reorganise automatically

    Set Visible Task Properties


    Choose what Task details appear on each Task Card in List View. Show only the properties that matter for the day and hide all the rest.

    To hide or reveal properties:

    • Click at the top left of the List

    • Toggle any property you'd like to display on the Task Cards

    • Use the ⋮⋮ drag handles to reorder the properties on the Task Cards

    • Optionally, click the > beside the property to open more options

    • Use the to hide specific values within that property from view

    Recording Task Progress from Daily Lists


    Track daily progress in List View with a simple thumbs up or down. Every update adjusts the task, schedule, and reporting, automatically.

    To record Task progress from List:

    • Locate the Task you want to update

    • Choose to mark it on track or improved, or to record a delay

    • If delayed, select a reason, add the number of impacted days, and optionally include a comment or photo

    See also: Progress Updates

    Filter your Daily Lists


    Filters in Aphex let you show only what matters, whether that’s Tasks with certain properties, or ones that are missing something. Keep it simple or build something more detailed, it's up to you.

    To filter a List View:

    • Click at the top of the List

    • In the dropdown that appears select and choose the property you'd like to filter by

    • Change the logic from options like or to or to hide or reveal the relevant Tasks

    • Click to swap between and

    See also: creating & sharing Views

    Filter Logic & Rules
    • All as well as can be applied as a filter

    • Archived values that are still in use will appear as filter options. Unused archived values will be hidden from the filter options

    • Tasks that do not match the filter criteria will be hidden from the List

    Creating Tags

    Creating tags lets you build a reusable library of Tags to assign to Tasks.

    To create a new Tag:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Tags from the menu

    • Click

    • Create your custom Tag by entering the name and assign a colour

    • The Tag is added to the library of Tag the team can assign to their Tasks

    Assigning Tags to Tasks


    Tags can be added to Tasks to help group and organise work across your plan, they’re a flexible way to highlight key information without changing the structure.

    To assign Tags to Tasks:

    • On the Gantt, open the column picker and toggle Tags

    • Click a cell in the column to add a Tag to the Task from the dropdown

    See also: Bulk Edits

    How Tags Work
    • Tags are a multi-select property

    • Archived Tags will no longer be available to add to tasks but will still exist on tasks it was assigned to before the resource was archived

    Filter by Tag


    Filtering by Tags lets you focus on specific Tasks based on what’s been added to them. It’s a quick way to review and manage work related to a particular Tag across your plan.

    To Filter by Tag:

    • Click then

    • Select Tag in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty or Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    • Select your desired Tag in the third dropdown

    See also: create & share Views

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Tag

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select

    Common Issues and Questions

    Some colleagues are still using email/password authentication while others SSO

    Scenario: SSO has been enabled, but some team members continue to log in using email and password instead of being redirected to SSO.

    Most likely cause: These colleagues have email addresses from domains that weren't included in your SSO configuration.

    Why this happens: Only domains that have been verified as part of the SSO setup process will trigger enforced SSO workflows. Construction teams often use email aliases for joint venture projects or project-specific emails (e.g., [email protected] vs [email protected]). If the joint venture domain wasn't included when SSO was set up, those users won't be subject to SSO enforcement.

    Resolution:

    1. For administrators: Review which domains were registered during SSO setup. You can view and modify these settings in the Aphex admin console, or contact [email protected] to add any missing domains that should be subject to SSO.

    End users getting "unauthorised" error from Microsoft/IdP after login attempt

    Scenario: User attempts to log in, gets redirected to identity provider (e.g., Microsoft), but receives an "unauthorised" error screen.

    Most likely cause: The user hasn't been assigned to the Aphex application in your identity provider.

    Why this happens: For authentication to succeed, your identity provider needs to confirm both who the user is and that they have permission to access Aphex. This permission is controlled by application assignments within your IdP.

    Resolution:

    1. For end users: Contact your internal IT team to request access to the Aphex application

    2. For administrators:

      • Log into your identity provider (e.g. Microsoft Entra, Okta)

      • Navigate to the Aphex enterprise application

      • Assign the user or their group to the application

      • Refer to step 4 in our guide for detailed instructions

    Important: Unless directly sync is being used, user management typically happens within Aphex. To avoid duplicated effort and the need to add or remove users from both within Aphex and your IdP, we recommend assigning a broad group or making the application available to everyone.

    If Directory Sync is enabled then the IdP becomes the primary manager of users.

    Logging in with one email but accessing a different account

    Scenario: User logs in with [email protected] but gets logged into an account for [email protected], or receives an error about the @company1.com account being unauthorised.

    Most likely cause: The primary identifier returned by your identity provider differs from the email address the user is attempting to use for login.

    Why this happens: When a user enters any email address from a domain configured for SSO, Aphex routes them to your identity provider. However, the identity provider returns its own primary identifier for that user (which might be their main corporate email), regardless of which alias they used to initiate login.

    Resolution:

    1. For End Users:

      • Check which email address your Aphex invitation was sent to - this indicates the account you should be accessing

      • Ask your administrator which email address was used when your account was set up

      • Use that primary email address for login

    2. For administrators:

      • Review what identifier field is being mapped from your IdP to Aphex (user principal name, primary email, etc.) in the Aphex admin console

      • Ensure users understand which email address corresponds to their Aphex account

      • Consider whether the current mapping strategy aligns with how your users expect to access the system

    Setting up SAML SSO

    When SSO is enabled for your domain, you will be unable to log in with any other method. E.g. if your email is [email protected] and SSO is enabled for wayneindustries.com domain, you must use SSO and cannot sign in with a password or social providers.

    Log In Steps

    1. Head to the Aphex log-in page (app.aphex.co)

    2. Enter your email address in the login form and submit

    3. You will be redirected to your Identity Provider (Microsoft, Okta, etc) to confirm your identity

    4. Once completed, you will be redirected back to Aphex in a logged-in state

    Troubleshooting

    If you have issues with logging into Aphex via SSO, please check the following possible issues;

    1. Unable to proceed past the login page with no visible errors:

      • This usually means you have attempted an invalid login method (such as email/password) while SSO is enabled.

      • The most common cause is your browser attempting to autofill and auto-submit your email and password.

      • To solve this, please delete the saved password in your password manager

    2. User does not exist error:

      • This usually means that the email address returned by the Identity Provider does not exist in Aphex.

        • This could indicate that you are a new user and can head to the Sign Up page, or

    3. Successful login but cannot find your usual projects

      • This usually means that the email address returned by the Identity Provider does not match your usual one in Aphex.

    Enter your new password, confirm it and hit Continue

    Your Aphex password will now be updated accordingly!

    app.aphex.co

    Gantt

    Board

    List

    Map

    Tasks

    Blockers

    Calendars

    Clashes & Work Area

    Exports

    Folders

    Labour & Plant

    Locations

    Master Schedule Import

    Materials

    Owner, Assignee & Teams

    Packages

    Printing

    Publishing

    Readying & Reviewing

    Relationship Links

    Shift

    Spreadsheet Import

    Status

    Subcontractor

    Tags

    Views

    Shift

    Who can use this feature?

    Admins, Owners and Assignees can update the Shift on a Task.

    Shifts help you show when work is planned to happen whether it’s during the day, in the afternoon, overnight, or across multiple shifts.

    Assigning a Shift to Tasks


    Assigning a Shift to a task helps clearly communicate when the work is planned to happen.

    Change the shift of the Task:

    • On the Gantt, navigate to the column picker and toggle Shift

    • Click a cell in the column and select from Day, Night, Afternoon or All

    See also:

    Shift types
    Option
    Meaning
    Shift Rules
    • When a task is created Day shift is automatically assigned

    • Shifts are hard coded in Aphex and new shifts cannot be created

    Group By Shift


    Group by Shift gives you a simple way to lay out your plan by all the different Shifts the team is working. This is possible across all View types, but let's start by looking at Group By Shift on Board.

    Group by Shift on Board:

    • Click

    • Select Shift

    Colour by Shift


    Increase visibility of Shifts by updating the task bar, card colour, or work area based on shifts assigned to Tasks.

    Colour by Shift on Gantt:

    • Open a Gantt View

    • Click

    • Click Bar Colour and select Shift

    Colour by Shift on Board:

    • Open a Board View

    • Click

    • Click Task Card Colour and select Shift

    Colour by Shift on Map:

    • Open a Map View

    • Click

    • Click Work Area Colour and select Shift

    Filter by Shift


    Filter by Shift to see Tasks planned for a specific time of day, perfect for coordinating teams across different shifts.

    Filter by Shift:

    • Click and

    • Select Shift in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is or Is Not in the second dropdown

    See also: create & share

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Troubleshooting your ArcGIS integrations

    Integrating ArcGIS layers into Aphex allows construction teams to visualise their schedules on top of the actual project design, imagery or services. If you have any issues during setup, this is a really useful starting point that collects the most common problems and resolutions.

    Aphex Project Setup Requirements

    To set up an ArcGIS integration, make sure your Aphex project has the following;

    1. Subscription: There is an active subscription to Pro+ or Enterprise plans (unless your project is on the Limited Beta program)

    2. Location: A Map Space location is created from the Locations page in Aphex Planner, and you are initiating the integration from this Map Space location.

    Common Issues or Questions

    Aphex supports layers being connected from any ArcGIS service (Online or Enterprise); however, there are some common things to validate if you experience issues;

    Layer Access

    Connecting an ArcGIS layer to Aphex requires valid credentials to be provided during setup. Please make sure that the credentials provided have permission to view the layers being connected.

    If you are using a Registered User account for access, you can test the access level of that account by simply logging into your ESRI/ArcGIS account and attempting to open the layer you want to integrate. If you can open a layer in ArcGIS, your account has permission to view it.

    Supported Layers

    Aphex currently supports the following source resources from ArcGIS;

    • Feature Layers

    • Map Image Layers

    • Tile Layers (Raster and Vector)

    • Web Map Tile Service (WMTS)

    Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) Restrictions

    By default, ArcGIS allows CORS - meaning external services like Aphex can, with the appropriate credentials, view resources such as layers. However, some GIS administrators may disallow this feature as an added security feature.

    If you find that a layer connects successfully, but no data is visible on the map, it may be a result of the ArcGIS CORS policy at your company.

    ArcGIS supports CORS access enabled, disabled, or disabled with exceptions. Therefore you can either ask your GIS administrator to return the CORS policy to default enabled or to add the following domains as CORS exceptions;

    • https://app.aphex.co

    • https://dev.aphex.co

    Please ensure you add the CORS exception domains exactly as they appear above.

    For guides on adjusting the ArcGIS CORS policy, please refer to the ArcGIS Help Guide .

    Layer Performance Issues

    Aphex is designed to be as fast and lightweight as possible for users who could be accessing their project on poor connections or underpowered devices.

    ArcGIS, however, is a powerful GIS service that allows its customers to create immense geographical datasets.

    Connecting an ArcGIS layer to Aphex will allow that layer to be loaded to an almost identical way to the way that layer is loaded from ESRI services.

    To keep load times as short as possible, each sublayer within a layer can be set to Hide or Show, depending on the context needed at the time.

    There is currently a limit of 42 sublayers per layer - any sublayers that attempt to load past this amount will not render.

    In general, Aphex should take as long to load a layer as it takes ArcGIS to load the same layer. You can test the expected load time for your users by opening a layer natively in ArcGIS first.

    Therefore, teams creating layers for use in Aphex should seek to balance information and end-user performance. The more data that is included in a layer, the longer it will take to load for everyone.

    Some common tactics can be used to maximise layer loading performance in both ArcGIS and Aphex;

    • Layer Type: Tiled or raster image layer types generally load faster than feature layers. This is especially true for layers with many strings (lines), such as design alignments. Where possible, seek to publish layers with these types;

      • Map Image Layers: Designs, utilities, alignments. Anything that is suited to a feature layer will perform well in Aphex as a Map Image.

      • Tile Layers: Drone or other aerial imagery are often already stored as tile layers and perform well. If your company's ESRI account doesn't support this, Map Image will work, too.

    Troubleshooting Microsoft Teams External Access

    Aphex uses Microsoft Teams to communicate with customers and their users where they typically communicate internally. We do this for training, support, coordination, and analytics work. This allows us to provide real-time support with fast response times.

    From time to time, some customers find that we're unable to create group chats due to external access restrictions in their Teams configuration.

    When You Might Need This Guide


    Your Aphex Customer Success Manager might contact you saying they're experiencing an error when trying to add team members to a Teams group chat. The error typically appears as:

    • "We can't set up the conversation because your organisations are not set up to talk to each other"

    • "External access is not enabled for this organisation"

    If your Customer Success Manager reports seeing these errors, it's usually caused by your organisation's Teams external access settings blocking communication with external domains.

    Prerequisites


    To resolve this issue, you'll need:

    • Teams Administrator Access: The person making these changes must have Microsoft Teams administrator privileges in your Microsoft 365 environment

    • Permission to Modify Security Settings: This change affects organisation-wide communication policies, so appropriate approval may be required depending on your company's change management process

    Enabling Aphex External Communication


    Step : Access Teams External Communications Settings

    1. Go to

    2. Sign in with Teams administrator credentials

    Step : Configure External Domain Settings

    You have two recommended options:

    Option A: Allow All External Domains (Simplest)

    1. In the "Teams and Skype for Business users in external organisations" section

    2. Select "Allow all external domains" from the dropdown

    3. Click Save

    Option B: Allow Specific Domains (More Restrictive)

    1. In the "Teams and Skype for Business users in external organisations" section

    2. Select "Allow only specific external domains"

    3. Add aphex.co to the allowed domains list

    4. Click Save

    Step : Test the Configuration

    1. Wait 2-4 hours for the changes to propagate across Microsoft's systems

    2. Contact your Aphex Customer Success Manager to test group chat creation

    3. Verify functionality by sending a test message in the group chat

    If issues persist after 4 hours, contact your Teams administrator to verify the configuration was saved correctly.

    How Aphex Uses AI

    Our Approach to AI

    At Aphex, we see AI as a tool that can be embedded within core workflows to help construction teams plan, communicate, coordinate, and track their work more effectively. Rather than building standalone AI chatbots, we focus on solving specific user problems where AI provides the best path to a solution.

    We always start with identifying genuine user problems. When we find that AI offers the most effective way to solve these problems, we explore that path thoughtfully and transparently.

    Current AI Implementation

    Today, our AI features are implemented within our Diary product. Teams using only our core Planner product will not encounter any AI functionality.

    How We Use AI in Diary

    We currently use AI in three main ways within the Diary product:

    1. Capturing Site Records Easily

    Making it frictionless for site teams to create diary entries through multiple input methods.

    Current examples include:

    • Voice to Text: Real-time transcription of spoken notes using mobile devices

    • Image to Text: Converting handwritten notes from photos into digital text

    2. Organising and Summarising Site Records

    Helping teams compile and structure their daily records efficiently.

    Current examples include:

    • Diary Summary Generation: Automatically compiling notes, progress updates, and photos into coherent daily summaries

    3. Analysing and Finding Information Across Site Records

    Enabling teams to extract insights and locate specific information from their project records.

    Examples in development:

    • Search functionality: Query across multiple diary records to find specific information

    • Automated recaps: Scheduled summaries of diary records (e.g., night shift updates)

    External AI Providers

    Our AI features currently use these external service providers which Aphex interacts with via API:

    Provider
    Example Use Cases

    Data Handling by Providers

    Provider
    Provider Security Posture
    Security Page

    Exports

    Who can use this feature? All Project users can export Project data.

    Exporting lets you download key project data from live plans and published versions to Resources, Folders, Blockers, and Milestones.

    Exporting Live Plans


    Milestones

    Who can use this feature

    All Project users can convert a Task to a Milestone.


    Task Owners, Assignees and Admins can edit the Milestone Target Date.

    Milestones mark critical points in your project, from contract deliverables to site handovers. In Aphex, they work just like Tasks, so you can assign all the same details: like Owners, Resources, Subcontractors, Blockers, Work Areas, and Delays.

    Milestones can include a fixed Target Date, giving you a reference point to track progress against. The Gantt will summarise & highlight whether you're on track or slipping, across all your Milestones.

    Spreadsheet Import

    Who can use this feature?

    All Project Users can import Tasks via CSV.

    If your plan already lives in Excel, you don’t need to start from scratch. Quickly import Task names, dates and more - turn your spreadsheet into a live plan in Aphex.

    Troubleshooting Aphex

    Quick Fixes

    Running Aphex on your browser requires your browser to be in good health. If not, it's possible that you may experience any of the following:

    • Stuck on 'Fetching Data' loading screen

    Setting up SAML SSO

    A guide for system administrators to configure an enable SAML based SSO for their teams.

    Who can use this feature? SSO is available on Enterprise plans You will need to have Administrator access to your company's IdP platform (Active Directory, Okta or similar)

    Single Sign On (SSO) allows users to log into many applications or websites using an identity provider. Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) is a security standard for managing authentication and access.

    In a SAML SSO set-up, the identity provider manages the organisation's user accounts and credentials. The service provider (Aphex) is the app or website that provides services to the user or organisation.

    When using SAML SSO, members are forced log in to their Aphex account using the organisation's identity provider.

    Your Primary Email address returned by your Identity Provider is different than you expect. For example, if your Aphex account is usually accessed from [email protected] but your company identifies you as [email protected] you will appear as a new and separate user.
    If needed, you can adjust identifier mapping settings in the admin console or contact [email protected] for assistance
    Setting up SAML SSO

    Server Selection: If your company can publish layers to an Enterprise or ArcGIS online server, there is usually a performance difference across those. Whichever is faster for loading layers in the ESRI service will be faster in Aphex.

    here

    AssemblyAI

    Voice transcription

    OpenAI

    Text and image processing, diary summarisation.

    Anthropic

    Possible future use

    AssemblyAI

    • Supports customer "opt out" requests which Aphex has done.

    • Deletes most API content within 3 days

    OpenAI

    • Does not train models on business data by default

    • Has no right of ownership to inputs and outputs (where allowed by law).

    • Deletes all API context after 30 days

    Anthropic

    • Does not train models on business data by default

    • Has no right of ownership to inputs and outputs (where allowed by law).

    • Deletes all API context after 30 days

    https://support.assemblyai.com/collections/1705441896-security
    https://openai.com/enterprise-privacy/
    https://privacy.anthropic.com/en/collections/10663361-commercial-customers
    https://admin.teams.microsoft.com/company-wide-settings/external-communications

    Used when a task spans multiple shifts or doesn’t fit neatly into a single timeframe.

    Select from Day, Night, Afternoon or All in the third dropdown

    Day

    Used for tasks planned during the daytime. Typically, for tasks within standard site hours.

    Afternoon

    Applies to work scheduled later in the day. Ideal for teams running extended hours beyond the usual daytime window.

    Night

    Covers tasks planned to take place overnight. Common for work that needs to happen outside normal site hours.

    Shift

    Is Is Not

    Day, Night, Afternoon, All

    Bulk Edits
    Views

    All

    You can export your live plan from the Gantt, Map, Board, or List views. The export will reflect whatever filters and dates you’ve set at the time.

    To export a Live plan:

    • Open your preferred view and click

    • Select

    Exporting Live Plans Rules
    • Data included in the file is defined by the Filters and Dates set at the time of the export.

    • The export includes three files: one for Tasks, one for Progress Updates and one for Folders

    Exporting Published Versions


    Exporting a published version lets you download plan data exactly as it was at the moment it was published. The export will reflect whatever filters and dates you’ve set at the time.

    To export a Published version of a plan:

    • Open any Published version and Click

    • Select Export Tasks to CSV

    See also: Publishing

    Exporting Published Versions Rules
    • Data included in the file is defined by the Filters and Dates set at the time of the export.

    • The export includes three files: one for Tasks, one for Progress Updates and one for Folders

    Exporting Resources


    Export the Resource Overlay to get a daily breakdown of Labour, Plant, Materials, or Subcontractors based on your current view and filters.

    To export Resources:

    • Navigate to the Gantt view and select

    • Click and select the desired resource

    • Select and click

    See also: Resource Overlay

    Resource Utilisation Tool
    Option
    Meaning

    Total Task Utilisation

    The number of Tasks that have the Resource assigned per day

    Total Project Utilisation

    The daily allocation of the Resource

    Exporting Resources Rules
    • Data included in the file is defined by the Filters and Dates set at the time of the export.

    • The export includes two files: one for Total Task Utilisation and one for Total Project utilisation.

    Exporting Folders


    Exporting a project’s folder structure creates a CSV file with each Folder’s name and code, making it easy to review or reuse your Folder setup.

    To export Folders:

    • Click your project title in the top left

    • Select Project Assets

    • Open the Folders page from the menu

    • Select

    See also: Folders

    Exporting Folders Rules
    • A Folders CSV will be downloaded

    Exporting Blockers


    You can export Blockers from the live Gantt, and the file will match whatever filters and dates you’ve set at the time.

    To export Blockers:

    • Navigate to the right-side of the Gantt and click

    • Click the configuration icon and select

    See also: Blockers

    Exporting Blockers rules
    • Data included in the file is defined by the Filters and Dates set at the time of the export.

    • A Blockers CSV is downloaded

    Exporting Milestones


    You can export Milestones from the live Gantt, and the export will reflect the filters and date range you’ve set at the time.

    To export Milestones:

    • Navigate to the right-side of the Gantt and click

    • Click the configuration icon and click

    Exporting Milestones Rules
    • Data included in the file is defined by the Filters and Dates set at the time of the export.

    • A Milestone CSV is downloaded

    See also: Milestones

    Creating Milestones


    To create a Milestone, convert any existing Task or Subtask, or import Milestones directly from your Master Schedule.

    Create a Milestone from the Gantt:

    • Hover over the task name

    • Click and select Convert to Milestone

    Milestone Conversion Logic
    • Each Milestone spans at least one day, just like every Task in your plan.

    • Only Tasks and Subtasks can be converted to Milestones

    • When converted, the Milestone keeps all its original Task properties, including duration, delay history, owner, and assigned resources

    • Attempting to set the Duration to 0 will also trigger the Convert to Milestone flow

    • You can convert a Milestone back into a Task or Subtask at any time

    Milestone Target Dates


    Each Milestone can be assigned a Target Date: the original or ideal date you’re aiming for, often pulled from a Master or Contract Schedule. The Target Date marker changes colour based on performance, helping you see at a glance how things are progressing against the plan.

    To set a Target Date:

    • Right click a Milestone and select View Details

    • In the Task Panel that opens, locate the Target Date section

    • Toggle Set Target Date

    • Pick the date

    To See Target Date Variance on the Gantt:

    • If your Milestone has slipped the Target Date marker will appear as

    • If your Milestone is on track, Target Date marker will appear as

    • Use the +/- indicators to see how many days a Milestone is ahead or behind

    Target Date Logic
    • Target Dates will show green if:

      • The Milestone End Date matches the Target Date

      • The Milestone End Date is before the Target Date

    • Target Dates will show red if:

      • The Milestone End Date is after the Target Date

    • On the Gantt, a Variance Number will show how many days the Milestone has slipped or improved by

    • Target Date Icons & Variance update in real time as changes are made to the plan

    Tracking Milestone Performance


    Use the Milestone Panel to compare current Milestone Dates to Target Dates, or pervious Weekly Versions to see how things have shifted over time - and spot the impact of today's changes on future Milestones, even if they're outside of your View.

    Open the Milestone Panel:

    • On the Gantt, select the Milestone Icon in the right-hand panel

    • This opens the Milestone Panel, showing Milestones across the Project

    • Click the ⌄ next to any Milestone to expand its history and see how it’s changed over time

      • Open the config menu to toggle filters for delayed or improved Milestones

    Target Date Comparison:

    • In the Milestones Panel, click into the Compare To dropdown

    • Select Target Date

    • Instantly see how many days ahead/behind for each Milestone, compared to their Target Dates

    Baseline Comparison:

    • In the Milestones Panel, click into the Compare To dropdown

    • Select Previously Published Version

    • Instantly view the variance between current and baseline dates

    See also: Export Milestone Data

    Critical Path Overlay


    Turn on the Critical Path Overlay to highlight the short term path to any Milestone. The critical path will light up in gold, and everything else fades to blue - so it's easy to see what's critical and what's not. You can view paths for all Milestones or focus on one at a time.

    To turn on the Critical Path

    • Open the Gantt and click

    • Select Critical Path to highlight all Milestone paths in gold

    • Or click the > to choose specific Milestone pathways to highlight individually

    Filter to Milestones


    To set a Milestone filter:

    • Click and

    • Select Milestone in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is True or Is False in the second dropdown

    Pre-made Milestones View:

    Your Project comes with a pre-made Upcoming Milestones View.

    • Click + Views within the open View Tabs

    • Select Upcoming Milestones View

    See also: creating & sharing Views

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Milestones

    Is True Is False

    Multi-Select

    Upload or Paste your Spreadsheet

    Start by selecting your CSV file or copying data directly from your spreadsheet.

    To upload your data:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left

    • Select Import Tasks

    • Choose between Upload a CSV or Copy and Paste

    • Upload your CSV file, or paste your data into the importer

    • Select

    Supported Migration Sources

    The migration tool is built to support CSV formatted data.

    If your plans are in any system with rows and columns, you can most likely either export the data directly to CSV or copy the data from the interface and paste it into a CSV or other spreadsheet.

    Should your existing data be inconsistently structured due to headings or another formatting technique, you can download an example CSV template below and paste your relevant data before importing.

    Sample CSV Import File

    What can you import?

    The importer supports mapping of the following six properties on imported tasks. At least one mapping is required for a valid import:

    Property
    Accepted Format
    Default Value

    Task Name

    Any String

    "New Task"

    Start

    Imported tasks will be assigned to the project's default calendar and the owner undertaking the migration.

    Map your data to Aphex


    Aphex will scan your spreadsheet and show the columns it found. Just match each one to the right Aphex property - like Task Name, Start Date, or Shift. You only need to map what you’re using.

    To map properties:

    • Choose which columns in your spreadsheet match Aphex properties like Task Name, Start Date, End Date, Subcontractor, Shift, or Package.

    • If needed, toggle Exclude up to row to skip up to the first 10 rows - handy if your file includes notes or headers before the actual data starts

    • Select

    Confirm your Tasks


    Get a quick sense check of what you’re about to create. We’ll show you a preview of the task names, dates, and any mapped fields so you can confirm it’s all as expected.

    To complete the import:

    • Review the Tasks you're about to import

    • If you're happy, select to add your Tasks to the Plan

    What happens after the import is complete?
    • Imported tasks will be assigned to the project's default calendar and the owner undertaking the migration.

    • Assigned Project Assets, such as Packages or Subcontractors will be created automatically if required.

    • Tasks will be created in the plan immediately

    Notification of Errors like 'Disconnected from Server' or 'Internal Server Error'

  • Unresponsive pages

  • Unresponsive actions

  • Chat / Aphex Messenger not loading

  • Good news! We've found most of these issues are resolved after taking some minor steps below to check the health of your browser.

    Turn off any browser extensions when you're accessing Aphex

    • Microsoft Edge

    • Google Chrome

    Ensure your browser is updated to the latest version

    • Google Chrome

    • Microsoft Edge

    Clear your browser's cookies/history/cache

    • Google Chrome

    • Microsoft Edge

    Test accessing Aphex from another browser or from an Incognito window

    • Google Chrome

    • Microsoft Edge

    Hard refresh Aphex in your browser

    Need to reset your password? Head here.

    Network Access Issues

    If you've given all the troubleshooting steps above a shot and you're still stuck, then it's likely some of the services or technology we require to run Aphex are being blocked by your device or company IT security.

    We'd recommended unblocking and (or) whitelisting the following domains from HTTPS/SSL inspection:

    • aphex.co

      • Inc. subdomains: app.aphex.co, help.aphex.co

    • .cloudfunctions.net

    • https://firestore.googleapis.com

    • https://storage.googleapis.com/aphex-prod.appspot.com

    • https://storage.googleapis.com/aphex-prod-aus.appspot.com

    • api.workos.com

    Also, if it's specifically the Aphex Chat Messenger that's not loading, unblocking and(or) whitelisting these domains from HTTPS/SSL inspection should do the trick:

    • api-iam.intercom.io

    • widget.intercom.io

    If you'd like a hand liaising with your company's IT tech to get things diagnosed and sorted, we're more than happy to help! Feel free to copy us in, or drop us a line directly on [email protected]

    How SAML SSO works:
    1. Member attempts to log in to Aphex with an email at a registered SAML SSO domain

    2. Aphex enforces login via SAML SSO

    3. Aphex sends a SAML request to the identity provider

    4. The identity provider checks this member's credentials

    5. The identity provider sends a response to Aphex to verify the member's identity

    6. Aphex accepts the response and logs the member into their Aphex account

    7. If the user is new, they will be provisioned in

    Note: Aphex uses SAML 2.0 for all SAML SSO configurations. This includes configurations with supported identity providers and any custom configurations.

    Like most software services, Aphex utilises "Email" as the unique identifier of a user.

    Set up SAML SSO

    The process for configuring SAML will depend on your specific identity provider. We've outlined the general process for implementing SAML SSO below.

    SAML SSO only applies to users from the organisation's registered domains. Other users (from other domains) accessing the organisation's data in Aphex can continue to log in via other methods such as email + password or Sign in with Microsoft.

    1. Confirm domains

    Domains are the way we identify entities on the internet. They let Aphex know which authentication methods to allow or enforce for users.

    Organisations can typically have a single domain however, we do support more than one domain, including subdomains.

    For example: ACME Corp has three domains registered to their organisation: acme.org, acme-abc-jv.com, and acjv.com.

    Anyone with an acme.org, acme-abc-jv.com, or acjv.com email address will be subject to the enforced SSO rules applied.

    If you plan on using SAML SSO, you may want to consider sub-brands and joint ventures that your company controls. Be aware that email aliases will not work with SAML SSO.

    2. Request SSO to be enabled on your domains

    Contact your Account Manager or Customer Success Manager to request the SAML SSO setup for your domains.

    Once approved, you will be provided with access to an SSO which will guide you through the set up.

    3. Add Aphex to your identity provider

    Within your company's identity provider, create or register a new enterprise application for Aphex. As you setup the SAML SSO for the application you will need to enter the information provided in the prior step.

    When you add Aphex to your identity provider, they will provide you with;

    • Identifier (for example: Microsoft Entra ID Identifier)

    • Login URL

    • Logout URL (optional)

    • Certificate (in Base64, Raw or XML format)

    Azure AD (Entra) customers can choose to simply provide their App Federation Metadata Url in lieu of the above.

    You will need to save these and return them securely to your Aphex Account Manager or Customer Success Manager.

    Certain services allow you to customise the logo of your Enterprise application. If so, you can use this logo here.

    4. Assign selected user or group in IdP

    Now that you have created the enterprise application, you need to assign your users/user groups to it.

    1. Under the Getting started section, select Assign users and groups.

    2. Select the Add user/group button.

    3. Under Users, select the None Selected link.

    4. In the search field, enter the user or group of users that you want to assign to the enterprise application.

    5. Select the check box next to the user or group that you want to assign.

    6. Select the Select button at the bottom of the page.

    7. Select the Assign button at the bottom of the page.

    Important: Unless directly sync is being used, user management typically happens within Aphex. To avoid duplicated effort and the need to add or remove users from both within Aphex and your IdP, we recommend assigning a broad group or making the application available to everyone.

    If Directory Sync is enabled then the IdP becomes the primary manager of users.

    5. Configure Custom Claims

    Aphex will expect three specific properties as part of the SAML SSO configuration. You can add these as custom claims in your IdP;

    • firstName: The user's fist name (For example this will be mapped to user.givenname in Microsoft Entra)

    • lastName: The user's last name (For example this will be mapped to user.surname in Microsoft Entra)

    • mail: The user's unique, primary email address (For example this will be mapped to user.userprincipalname in Microsoft Entra)

    6. Test Connection

    Once configured, the connection can be tested in a development environment with your Aphex Account Manager or Customer Success Manager.

    7. Request Production Deployment

    Once tested, your Aphex Account Manager or Customer Success Manager can deploy your SAML SSO configuration.

    The next time users from your domains attempt to access Aphex they will be required to login again and the use of SAML SSO will be enforced (meaning they will no longer be able to use their prior authentication methods).

    Packages

    Who can use this feature?

    All project users can create & own Packages.


    Project Admins can edit and archive Packages.

    Packages give you a flexible way to organise your Tasks without changing the project’s core structure. While the Folder tree typically remains the shared backbone of the plan, Packages let anyone group Tasks by whatever makes the most sense for delivery: zones, trades, phases, disciplines - you decide.

    They’re easy for anyone to create, drag into a custom order, and use to shape views that are more practical for how you plan and build.

    Creating Packages


    Packages can be created at any time while planning. Just give it a name and you're ready to start grouping Tasks in a way that works for you.

    To create a Package from the Gantt:

    • Make sure that your is set to Package

    • An option to Create Package will appear on the Gantt

    • Click this and give your new Package a name

    How Packages Work
    • Once a Package is created, it becomes available to everyone on the Project

    • Any user can assign their Tasks to an existing Package

    • A Task can only belong to one Package at a time

    Adding Tasks into a Package


    Once your Packages are set up, it's easy to start using them. Add new Tasks straight into a Package, or update existing Tasks to move them into the right Package.

    Move existing Tasks into a Package:

    • On the Gantt, open the column picker and toggle Package

    • Click the Package cell for your task & select a Package from the dropdown menu

    • Alternatively, use drag and drop to move a Task into a Package

    See also:

    Package Properties
    Property
    Description

    Group By Package


    Group by Package gives you a simple way to lay out your plan around the Packages you're using. This is possible across all View types, but let's start by looking at Group By Package on the Board.

    To Group By Package on the Board:

    • Open a Board View

    • Click

    • Select Package

    • Optionally, select a different Primary Group, and select Package as the Sub-Group

    Packages are flat and do not allow for sub-packages to be created. If you need more hierarchy, it's best to use Subfolders to build out your plan.

    Reorder Packages


    Change the order of Packages in your Plan by dragging and dropping them.

    To reorder Packages:

    • Hover over the Package you want to move

    • Use ⋮⋮ to drag your Packages in the order in which you want them to be displayed

    • Drop the Package to a new location

    Package Order Behaviour
    • The Package order is unique to each user, so moving them has no impact on how other users view them in the plan

    • For each View, you have have a custom Package order

    Filter by Package


    Apply a Package filter to see only the Tasks sitting in specific Packages in your Project .

    To filter by Package:

    • Click and

    • Select Package in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty or Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    See also: create & share

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Calendars

    Who can use this feature?

    Admin users can create, edit and archive the library of available Calendars.


    Task Owners, Assignees and Admins can change the Calendar allocated to their Tasks.

    Calendars define your project’s working and non-working days. Task durations are based only on the working days set in the assigned Calendar, so Tasks won’t be scheduled on non-working days.

    Creating Calendars


    Create a custom Calendar to set specific working and non-working days that match your project’s schedule.

    To create a Calendar:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Calendars from the menu

    • Click

    • Add a name and choose a colour to represent the Calendar

    See also:

    Aphex provided Calendars
    Name
    Working Days
    Project Default Calendar
    • The default Calendar will be applied to all New Tasks created in the Project

    • If you change the default later, it won’t affect existing Tasks, they’ll stay on the calendar they were originally assigned

    Non-Working Days

    Adding non-working days to a Calendar will automatically prevent tasks from being scheduled on those days. You can create multiple calendars with different non-working patterns to suit your project.

    Edit an existing Calendar


    You can edit an existing Calendar to update working days, non-working days, change its name or colour.

    To edit a Calendar:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Calendars from the menu

    • Hover over the existing Calendar

    • Click

    Editing a Calendar in use

    Making changes and saving a Calendar that is in use generates a prompt with the following options:

    Prompt
    Function
    Exceptions

    Assigning Calendars to Tasks


    Assigning a Calendar to a Task sets its working days and controls when it can start or finish.

    To update the Calendar on a Task:

    • On the Gantt, navigate to the column picker and toggle on Calendar

    • Click a cell in the column to add a Calendar to the Task from the dropdown

    • See the non-working days appear with reduced opacity on the Task Bar

    See also:

    Calendar Property Rules
    • Each Task can have one Calendar assigned, you can’t add multiple calendars to a single Task

    • Archived Calendars will no longer appear as an available option to add to tasks, but will still exist on any tasks they were assigned to before they were archived

    Filter by Calendar


    Filter by Calendar to focus on Tasks working to a certain schedule.

    To set a Calendar Filter:

    • Click and

    • Select Calendar in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is or Is Not in the second dropdown

    See also: create & share

    Status

    Who can use this feature?

    Admins & Owners can update Task Status. This can be changed to Admin only and Admins, Owners & Assignees in the Project Permissions


    Admins can regress Task Status, this can be changed to All Members in the Project Permissions

    Task Status helps track the lifecycle of work, from planning, to commitment, to completion. It’s a simple way to bring structure and accountability to the plan.

    Updating Task Status to Promised


    Promised Tasks are commitments. If the committed dates are changed, a delay reason must be recorded in order for the update to save.

    Change Task Status to Promised:

    • On the Gantt, use the Column Picker to toggle Status

    • Click the Status cell for your task & select Promised from the dropdown menu

    See also:

    How Promised Tasks Look in the Plan
    Status
    Visual

    Updating Task Status to Done


    Done Tasks are those determined to have actualised start and end dates. Done Tasks are locked in place so no date changes or Progress Updates can be made.

    Change Task Status to Done:

    • On the Gantt, use the Column Picker to toggle Status

    • Click the Status cell for your task & select Done from the dropdown menu

    See also:

    How Done Tasks Look in the Plan
    Status
    Visual

    Revert a Task Status to Planned


    Planned Tasks are those not yet promised to be delivered, and can be moved freely. This is the default state of all tasks.

    Revert Task Status to Planned:

    • On the Gantt, use the Column Picker to toggle Status

    • Click the Status cell for your task & select Planned from the dropdown menu

    How Planned Tasks Look in the Plan
    Status
    Visual

    Promised Period


    The promised Period can be set when Publishing. The Promised Period is shown as a hatched section on the Gantt, ending with a solid purple Promised Line.

    • On the Gantt, Hover over and Click

    • A menu will appear, on the menu click

    See also:

    Filter by Status


    Filtering by Status lets you show or hide Tasks based on whether they're Planned, Promised or Done.

    Filter by Status:

    • Click and

    • Select Status in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is or Is Not in the second dropdown

    See also: create & share

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Clashes & Work Area

    Who can use this feature?

    Task Owners, Assignees and Admins can add Work Areas to tasks.


    Clashes are visible to everyone on the Project. Admins and Task Owners can resolve Clashes.

    Work Areas let you define the physical space each Task needs to take place. Once a Task is assigned to a Location, you can draw its Work Area on the map. That shape stays linked to the Task and automatically updates as dates change - helping you communicate exactly where work is planned to happen.

    Locations

    Who can use this feature?

    All Project Users can allocate a Location to their Tasks.


    Project Admins can create and manage the Library of available Locations and External Map Layers.

    The Location library is where you create and manage all Locations for your Project. Locations can be geolocated maps that connect to external layers like ArcGIS or drone flyovers, or static images to represent a zone, floor, or layout. Each Task can be assigned to a Location - which can then be used in filters, to group the plan, or to open Map Views.

    Owner, Assignee & Teams

    Who can use this feature?

    Task Owners, Assignees and Admins can edit Task Assignees.


    Task Owners and Admins can update Task Ownership.


    All project users can create Teams.

    Subcontractor

    Who can use this feature?

    Task Owners, Assignees and Admins can allocate a Subcontractor to their Tasks.


    Project Admins can create and manage the library of available Subcontractors.

    Subcontractors can be assigned to Tasks to show who’s delivering the work. They help teams organise, group, and colour Tasks by Subcontractor, making it easier to coordinate and track progress across your plan.

    Readying & Reviewing

    Who can use this feature?

    Task Owners can make their part of the plan Ready


    Reviewers and Admins can approve plans on behalf of other Task Owners.

    Before a plan is published, you can mark your part as Ready to signal it’s up to date and good to go. Even if you don’t mark it as ready, your tasks will still be included in the published version.

    Project Settings

    Projects contain all the work, routines, assets, and users needed to deliver a specific project. Projects live inside an Organisation.

    Project Settings

    Setting
    Description

    Fair Billing Policy

    At Aphex, we believe software should demonstrate value before customers commit significant resources. Unlike the industry standard of locking customers into large upfront costs, our Fair Billing Policy allows organisations to scale their investment based on the actual value they receive. As your use of Aphex grows and delivers measurable benefits to your projects, your costs can adapt accordingly—putting control firmly in your hands.

    Key Concepts

    To help understand our billing approach, here are the fundamental elements of the Aphex platform:

    Term
    Definition

    Support Policy

    This Support Policy applies to the Support Services as defined in the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions. In the event of any inconsistency between this Support Policy and the terms of the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions, the terms of the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions will take priority.

    Definitions

    Unless the context requires otherwise, defined terms in the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions have the same meaning in this Support Policy, and the following definitions also apply:

    Business Day means a day on which banks are open for general banking business in the relevant support region, excluding Saturdays, Sundays and public or bank holidays.

    dd/MM/yyyy',

    'dd/MM/yy',

    'yyyy/MM/dd',

    'dd-MM-yyyy',

    'dd-MM-yy',

    'yyyy-MM-dd',

    'ddMMyy',

    'yyyyMMdd',

    Prefix of the day are also supported i.e. "Tue ddMMyyyy"

    Today

    End

    Same as Start

    Same as Start

    Shift

    'Day',

    'Afternoon',

    'Night',

    'All',

    Day

    Package

    Any String

    N/A

    Subcontractor

    Any String

    N/A

  • Packages are seperate from the Folder structure - assigning a Package does not change where the Task sits in the WBS

  • Each Package has a Name and an automagically generated Code to help distinguish between similarly named Packages

  • Archived Packages will no longer be available to add to tasks but will still exist on tasks it was assigned to before the Package was archived

  • Start date of the first Task within the Package

    End

    End date of the last Task within the Package

    Assigned to

    User(s) that have been assigned to all Tasks inside the Package

    Notes

    Additional text notes that can be attached the Package

    Comments

    Thread of communications on the Package

    Documents

    Documents that have been uploaded and attached to the Package

  • Select your desired Package in the third dropdown

  • Name

    Descriptive name given to the Package

    Package Tag Colour

    User-selected colour to represent the Package

    Owner

    User that is accountable for the Package

    Package

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select

    Bulk Edits
    Views

    Start

  • Pick your base Working Days

  • Click specific days on the Calendar to mark them as Working or Non-Working exceptions

  • Optionally,

  • Click Done once you're finished editing

  • The Calendar is added to the library of Calendars the team can assign to their Tasks

  • then select Edit
  • If the Calendar is already in use, select whether to apply changes to existing Tasks or keep their current dates unchanged

  • The edited calendar will not automatically be applied to any Tasks that have finished (no working days in progress or in the future)

    Select your desired Calendar in the third dropdown

    Five Day

    Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday

    Six Day

    Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday

    Seven Day

    Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday

    Save and hold dates on existing Tasks

    The edited calendar will not be applied to any existing Tasks

    Making any changes to the start date, end date or duration of a Task will apply the updated calendar to the Task

    Save and force reschedule existing Tasks

    Group Calendars
    Bulk Edits
    Views

    The edited calendar will be applied to all future planned tasks and Tasks with days in progress

    Select from Planned, Promised or Done in the third dropdown

    Promised

    Start and End Date Visualisation

    Promised

    Task Bar Visualisation

    Done

    Start and End Date Visualisation

    Done

    Task Bar Visualisation

    Planned

    Start and End Date Visualisation

    Planned

    Task Bar Visualisation

    Status

    Is Is Not

    Multi-Select

    Bulk Edits
    Bulk Edits
    Set Promised Period
    Views
    Clashes
    are triggered when two tasks are scheduled to use the same space at the same time. If their Work Areas overlap and their dates intersect, a Clash is flagged - giving teams a chance to coordinate early and avoid planning conflicts on site.

    Marking up a Work Area


    To create a Work Area, open a Task and draw the shape directly on the Map.

    To draw a Work Area:

    • On the Gantt, open the column picker and toggle Location and Work Area

    • Make sure the Task you want to mark up has the correct Location assigned

    • Double-click the Work Area cell to open the drawing window

    • Select the pen tool to draw a Work Area and click to mark each corner of the shape - no need to click and drag

    • Once the shape is complete, the cell will show that a Work Area has been added

    • The task can now be viewed on the Map

    Add a Work Area to multiple tasks:

    You can easily add the same Work Area to multiple Tasks by copying and pasting from the Work Area column:

    • In the Work Area column, select the cell with the Work Area to copy and press CTRL + C on your keyboard

    • Select the Work Area cell of the desired Task and press CTRL + V to paste the Work Area

    Tip!

    If you have multiple Tasks in a row that need the same Work Area:

    • Hold SHIFT between selecting the top and bottom cell to highlight everything in between, then CTRL + V will paste the Work Area into all of the Tasks at once

    See also: open a Map View

    Work Area Rules & Behaviour
    • Each task can have only one Work Area

      • To represent multiple areas, break the task into subtasks and assign a different Work Area to each

    • Work Areas must be complete shapes

      • You’ll need to draw a closed polygon, open shapes aren’t supported

    • Snapping helps prevent accidental clashes

      • While drawing, your cursor will snap near the edges of existing shapes (but never directly on top) to help avoid overlap

    • You can use drawing tools like pen, rectangle, or circle to mark up the shape

      • Use the hand tool to pan around the map

      • Zoom controls help you focus on the right area before you start drawing

    • To edit a Work Area, just open it and drag the points to adjust the shape

    • To remove a Work Area, right-click the cell and select Clear

    • If no Work Area is needed, you can set the cell to No Work Area Required

      • This completes the field without drawing anything on the map

    Identifying Clashes in the Plan


    If a Task clashes with another, you’ll see it right away on the Gantt. Clashing Task Bars turn red instantly, and selecting a Task highlights which days are safe to move to, and which would still result in a clash.

    To spot clashes on the Gantt:

    • Clashing Task Bars always appear red regardless of your settings or overlays

    • Single click a clashing Task Bar to see available dates on the Gantt

    • Aphex scans the full project and highlights cells behind the Task:

      • Red = moving here would still cause a clash

      • Blue = safe to move, no clash detected

    To highlight clashes on Map:

    • Open a Map View

    • Click

    • Select Highlight Issues

    • Pick Clashes

    • Tasks with clashes will have their Work Areas shown in red

    To see clashes on Board and List:

    • Tasks with Clashes will display this icon

    Clash Detection Rules

    A clash will only be triggered when all of the following are true:

    • The Tasks are in the present or future

    • The Tasks have overlapping Dates

    • The Tasks are on the same Shift

    • The Work Areas overlap

    • The Tasks haven't been marked as Non-Conflicting with each other in the past

    Find your Unresolved Clashes


    As a Task Owner, it's your responsibility to resolve any clashes related to the Tasks you own. The Clashes Panel shows a focused list of your clashing Tasks within the lookahead window, so you can review each one and make sure your part of the plan is conflict-free.

    To open the Clashes Panel:

    • Click the Clashes Icon in panel toward the right of the Gantt

    • The Clashes Panel will open

    • Here you will see a list of all unresolved clashes related to Tasks you own

    See also: Make Ready

    Resolving Clashes


    Once you’ve identified a clash, there are a few ways to resolve it. You can adjust the Dates, Shift, or Work Areas of the Tasks involved, helping create clear separation in time or space. If the clash isn’t actually a problem, and both Tasks can go ahead as planned, you can mark them as non-conflicting.

    To mark Tasks as non-conflicting:

    • Right click a clashing Task and select View Details

    • In the Task Panel, scroll to Related Tasks

    • You’ll see all clashing Tasks listed, along with their Owners

    • Click the icon to mark a clash pair as Non-Conflicting

      • If you don’t have permission to edit the other Task, a Clash Resolution Request will be sent to its owner

      • Once they accept, the clash will be resolved

    Non-Conflicting Rules

    Permissions:

    • Admins can mark any Clash as Non-Conflicting

    • Users who are Owners of both clashing Tasks can mark their own Clashes as Non-Conflicting

    • Users who are Owners of one clashing Tasks can request to mark a Clash as Non-Conflicting

    What happens when a clash is marked as Non-Conflicting:

    • The two Tasks are permanently linked as non-conflicting

    • Even if the Dates or Work Areas change in the future, they will not trigger a clash again

    Filter for Clashes


    You can filter any view to show just the clashing Tasks. It’s useful for Task Owners working through their own issues, or for Reviewers/Admins checking the plan’s readiness across the project.

    To filter to Tasks with Clashes:

    • Click and

    • Select Issue in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is or Is Not in the second dropdown

    • Select Clash in the third dropdown

    Pre-made Clashes View:

    Your Project comes with a pre-made Clashing Tasks View.

    • Click + Views within the open View Tabs

    • Select Clashing Tasks View

    See also: create and share Views

    Creating a Location

    Pick a Location type, set a name and save it to your Project's library.

    To create a Location:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left

    • Select Project Assets

    • Select Location from the menu

    • Click

    • Pick a Location Type; Model Space, Real World or Off Site

    • Give your Location a name and select

    See also: open a Map View

    Map Space Locations


    These are real-world Locations with coordinates - similar to Google Earth. You can switch between base maps (satellite or street), and connect external layers to give the team extra context while they’re planning.

    Add External Map Layers

    You can connect up to 10 external map layers to a Map Space Location. These layers come from tools like ArcGIS or drone services like Propeller, and let your team overlay context - like utilities, survey data, or design drawings - directly in the Map. Layers can be shown or hidden as needed to help mark up work areas or communicate plans more clearly.

    To add a Map Layer:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left

    • Select Project Assets

    • Select Location from the menu

    • Click into your Map Space Location

    • Select

    • Paste in your Layer URL and click Continue

    • If required, select the correct Credential to access the layer

    • Review the Layer Summary and click to add the layer to the Location

    See also: Connect to ArcGIS

    Layer Policies

    When you connect a layer, Aphex will detect all available sublayers. Layer Policies help you control which ones are brought into your project - and whether they stay synced automatically or not.

    Set a Layer Policy

    • Open the Configure Location Layer menu

    • Click into the Layer Policy dropdown

    • Make a selection from: Most Recent, Change Over Time, All Layers or Custom Selection

      • If you select Custom, use the checkboxes to manually pick sublayers

      • If you select Most Recent, define the Layer Quantity

    • Click to add the layer to your Location

    • The selected policy will apply to both existing and future sublayers

    These policies & selected Sublayers can be changed at any time.

    Layer Policy Definitions & Behaviour

    Most Recent*

    • Automatically updates with your most recent sublayers - choose up to 3

    Change Over Time*

    • Automatically updates to include your newest, median and oldest sublayers

    All Layers

    • Includes all sublayers and automatically connects to new sublayers

    Custom Selection

    • Choose which sublayers you want included - selected sublayers will update automatically, but new sublayers require manual selection

    *Temporal order is inferred from the layer order (bottom = oldest, top = newest) as dates aren’t always available

    Sublayers that were not successfully connected will display a icon next to the sublayer name - please check your source Layer service for more information.

    Model Space (Drawing) Locations


    Model Space Locations use a single uploaded image, like a site GA, floor plan, or layout export as the base for marking up Work Areas.

    Uploading a Location Image

    • Click your Project Title in the top left

    • Select Project Assets

    • Select Location from the menu

    • Click into your Map Space Location

    • Select

    • Select the file you want to upload

    • Select to add the image to the Location

    Replacing a Location Image

    • Locate the Location you'd like to replace

    • Hover the Image layer and click ...

    • Select Replace File

    • Upload your replacement image and confirm

    Be careful when replacing the Location Image

    Image replacements must match the original dimensions exactly. Work Areas are fixed to points on the image, if the scale or aspect ratio changes, Tasks risk being misaligned and may need to be redrawn.

    Supported Model Space File Types
    • PDF, JPEG (JPG), and PNG are the accepted file types for uploading images to Model Space (drawing) locations

    Off Site Locations


    Off Site Locations are simple placeholders for areas that aren't part of the site map. They're helpful for tagging work that happens elsewhere (like a precast yard) without need for a visual representation.

    Off Site Locations cannot be opened in a Map View, and no Work Areas can be marked up on them.

    Archiving a Location


    Archiving a Location removes it from active use - it can't be opened in Map View or assigned to Tasks. The data is still part of the project's history and you can restore it at any time if you need to bring it back.

    To archive a Location:

    • Locate the Location you'd like to replace

    • Hover the Image layer and click ...

    • Select Archive

    Assigning a Location to your Tasks


    Each Task can be assigned to a Location from your Project's library - the first step in showing that Task on the Map.

    To assign a Location:

    • On the Gantt, use the Column Picker to enable the Location column

    • Click the Location cell for your Task and choose a Location from the dropdown

    See also: mark up a Work Area

    Group by Location


    Group Tasks by Location to organise your plan by where work is happening. It's possible in all View Types, but let's first take a look at grouping by Location on the Gantt:

    Group by Location on the Gantt:

    • Open a Gantt View

    • Click the menu in the top left

    • Select Location as the primary grouping

    • Tasks will be arranged into groups based on their assigned Location

    • Use the ⋮⋮ to drag and reorder groups as needed

    Filter by Location


    Filter by Location to focus on Tasks happening in a specific area or zone.

    To set a Location Filter:

    • Click and

    • Select Location in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty in the second dropdown

    • Select your desired Location in the third dropdown

    See also: create & share Views

    Every Task in Aphex has an Owner: the person ultimately accountable for that scope of work. Owners can add Assignees to help update and progress the Task.

    Teams are collections of Tasks Owners you can use as quick filters, making it easy to see work owned by a specific group of Users.

    Updating Task Ownership


    Every Task will always have an Owner, but Ownership can be changed at any time. You can reassign Tasks individually or in bulk to reflect who’s now responsible.

    To change Task Ownership:

    • Open the column picker and toggle Owner

    • Click into the Owner cell

    • Select a different user from the dropdown

    Need to give another user the same permission as the Owner so that User A can always edit User B's tasks? Set up Owner Delegates.

    See also: Bulk Edits and Task Delegates and Task Permissions

    How Task Ownership Works
    • Every Task must have an Owner - and can only have one Owner at all times.

    • The person who creates the Task is automatically set as the Owner.

    • Ownership can be reassigned to any other User on the Project at any time.

    • The Owner has full permissions on the Task. They can edit, delete update progress, resolve clashes and mark it as Ready.

    • As the Owner, you're accountable for making sure your Tasks meet the standards for being included in the next Published Version.

    • By default, Task Bar colour is tied to it's Owner's user colour, unless custom colouring has been applied to your View

    • Tasks can be grouped by Owner across all View types

    Adding Task Assignees


    Assignees are collaborators on a Task. You can Assign one or more people to help update the Task - they’ll then see it in their daily Task List, can report progress, and make edits if needed.

    To add Task Assignees:

    • Open the column picker and toggle Assignee

    • Click into the + Assignee cell

    • Select all the users you want to set as Assignees

    See also: Bulk Edits and Task Delegates and Task Permissions

    How Assignees Work
    • You can add as many Assignees to a Task as needed - there's no limit.

    • Assignees can edit most properties of a Task, including updating Progress.

    • Assignees can't delete a Task, change the Owner, breakdown a Task, Make Ready or mark clashes as non-conflicting.

    • Adding someone as an Assignee also adds that Task to their daily Task List.

    • You can assign someone to a Parent Task or Package. They're automatically assigned to all Tasks underneath.

    Creating a Team


    Create a Team to group Task Owners for quick filtering. A team can be used in filters like “Owner = Civils Team” to show related work.

    To create a Team:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left and select Users

    • Select Teams from the menu

    • Click

    • Pick the Team Members and name your Team

    • Click Create Team

    How Teams Work
    • Teams are a collection of Users - you can make as many as you need.

    • Teams are used to filter Tasks or share Views

    • Teams don't affect Task Permission - they're for filtering and sharing Views only.

    • Adding someone to a Team won't let them edit more Tasks

    Filter by Owner, Assignee or Team


    You can filter any View by who Owns the Task, who's been Assigned to it, or which Team they're part of. It's a simple way to focus on just your scope, or keep track of work across different roles.

    To set an Owner Filter:

    • Click and

    • Select Owner in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is or Is Not in the second dropdown

    • Select from Me, any combination of specific Users, or any Team on the project

    To set an Assignee Filter:

    • Click and

    • Select Assignee in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is , Is Not, Is Empty or Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    • Select from Me, any combination of specific Users, or any Team on the project

    See also: create & share Views

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Owner

    Is Is Not

    Single-Select from the Project User list, Teams or Me (dynamic - will always show Tasks owned by the logged in user)

    Assignee

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select from the Project User list, Teams or Me (dynamic - will always show Tasks assigned to the logged in user)

    Group By Owner


    Grouping by Owner arranges the Plan by the person responsible for each Task. This is possible across all View types, but let's start by looking at Group By Owner on the Gantt:

    To Group By Owner on the Gantt:

    • Open a Gantt View

    • Click

    • Select Owner

    • Optionally, select a different Primary Group, and select Owner as the Sub-Group

    Group By Assignee


    Grouping by Assignee organises your Board by the person(s) each task is assigned to, so you can quickly see who’s working on what (and what’s still unassigned):

    To Group By Assignee on the Board:

    • Open a Board View

    • Click

    • Select Assignee

    • Optionally, select a different Primary Group, and select Assignee as the Sub-Group

    Colour by Owner


    Make it easier to see which Owner is responsible for an activity by changing your Task or Work Area colour according to which Owner is completing the Task

    To colour by Owner on the Board:

    • Open a Board View

    • Click

    • Click Task Card Colour and select Owner

    To colour by Owner on the Gantt:

    • Open a Gantt View

    • Click

    • Click Bar Colour and select Owner

    To colour by Owner on the Map:

    • Open a Map View

    • Click

    • Click Work Area Colour and select Owner

    Performance Breakdown by Owner


    Because every Task has a clear Owner, it's easy to track how each person is performing across the Project - not just in terms of delays, but also how consistently they're keeping their part of the plan up to date.

    Aphex Insight

    Aphex Insight gives you a live snapshot of Owner performance - no set up required. Automatically see which Owners are responsible for the highest shares of delay and why.

    Power BI

    User Power BI to build custom reporting on Owner delays and performance, based on data in your weekly Published Versions. Aphex provides free templates as a starting point but everything can be customised to suit your project reporting requirements.

    See also: Connect to Power BI

    Creating Subcontractors

    Creating Subcontractors lets you build a reusable library of Subcontractors to assign to Tasks.

    Creating new Subcontractors:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Subcontractors from the menu

    • Click

    • Create your Subcontractor by entering a name and assign a colour

    • The Subcontractor is added to the library of Subcontractors the team can assign to their Tasks

    How Subcontractors Work
    • Subcontractors are a single-select property

    • Subcontractor acts as a tag to show which company is delivering the work - it’s not a permission-setting field. If you want someone from that company to be able to update progress or edit the Task, add them as an Assignee or an Owner.

    • Tasks can be coloured by or grouped by Subcontractor across all View types

    • Archived Subcontractors will no longer be available to add to tasks but will still exist on tasks it was assigned to before the resource was archived

    Assigning Subcontractors to Tasks


    Assigning a Subcontractor to a Task can show who’s responsible for the work and helps with organising and visualising your plan.

    Adding Subcontractors to Tasks:

    • On the Gantt, use the column picker to toggle Subcontractor

    • Click a cell in the column and add a Subcontractor to the Task from the dropdown

    See also: Bulk Edits

    View Tasks by Subcontractor Colour


    Make it easier to see which Subcontractor is responsible for an activity by changing your Task or Work Area colour according to which Subcontractor is completing the Task.

    To colour by Subcontractor on the Gantt:

    • Open a Gantt View

    • Click

    • Click Bar Colour and select Subcontractor

    To colour by Subcontractor on the Board:

    • Open a Board View

    • Click

    • Click Task Card Colour and select Subcontractor

    To colour by Subcontractor on the Map:

    • Open a Map View

    • Click

    • Click Work Area Colour and select Subcontractor

    Organise your plan by Subcontractor


    Grouping by Subcontractor arranges the Plan by who's delivering each Task. This is possible across all View types, but let's start by looking at Group By Subcontractor on Board.

    To Group by Subcontractor on Board:

    • Click

    • Select Subcontractor

    • Optionally, select a different Primary Group, and select Subcontractor as the Sub-Group

    View Subcontractor Demand on the Gantt


    Turn on the Resources Overlay to see how many Tasks are planned each day per Subcontractor. You’ll get a clear view of daily workload, plus a breakdown of which Tasks are contributing to it.

    View the Resource Overlay by Subcontractor:

    • Open a Gantt View

    • Click and select

    • Click the icon on the left to view your Subcontractors

    • Hover over the numbers to view your Total and Project Utilisation

    • Click the Resources Configuration icon to switch between Tasks in View and Project Utilisation

    • Hover over the daily quantity value to see the daily breakdown

    What's Shown on Hover

    On hover, the daily breakdown includes:

    • # of Tasks

      • Number of Tasks in your current View assigned to that Subcontractor on the selected day (respects filters)

    • # no of Project Tasks

      • Number of Project-wide Tasks using assigned to that Subcontractor on the selected day (ignores filters)

    • Task Owner Breakdown

      • Lists each Task Owner contributing to Project usage

      • Includes Task Count and percentage of total utilisation for that day

    • Cell shading

      • Darker = higher quantity

      • Lighter - lower quantity

      • Scale is relative to the values shown in the current overlay

    • Quantity values are only shown in Day View

      • In Week, Month or Year mode, cell shading remains but numeric values are hidden

    Resource Overlay Configuration Options
    Option
    Function

    Total

    The demand for tasks in your current view

    Project Utilisation

    The demand for your entire project

    Hide Un-utilised resources

    Removes resources that aren’t assigned to any Tasks from the resource list

    Filter by Subcontractor


    Filter by Subcontractor to review and manage Tasks related to particular Subcontractors across your plan.

    Filter by Subcontractor:

    • Click then

    • Select Subcontractor in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty or Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    • Select your desired Subcontractor in the third dropdown

    See also: create & share Views

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Subcontractor

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select

    Performance Breakdown by Subcontractor


    Once Subcontractors have been assigned to Tasks, all updates (including Delays, On Track & Improvement events) can be traced back to each Subcontractor. This makes it easy to understand how each Subcontractor is performing across the project.

    Aphex Insight

    Aphex Insight gives you a live snapshot of Subcontractor performance - no set up required. Automatically see which Subcontractors are responsible for the highest shares of delay and why.

    Power BI

    User Power BI to build custom reporting on Subcontractor delays and performance, based on data in your weekly Published Versions. Aphex provides free templates as a starting point but everything can be customised to suit your project reporting requirements.

    See also: Connect to Power BI

    Unresolved Issues

    If you own Tasks in the lookahead period, it's your responsibility to make sure they're accurate, up to date and don't have any outstanding Unresolved Issue. This means Task Owners need to be mitigating any Clashes, adding Missing Data and resolving any Overdue Blockers.

    To see unresolved issues in your Plan:

    • Click your Publishing Deadline in the top right of the page

    • This will open the Make Ready Window

    • You'll see a count of all your Clashes, Missing Data and Overdue Blockers

    • Click any of the counts to open the relevant panel and start resolving issues

    Issue definitions
    Issue
    Meaning

    Clashes

    Any unresolved clashes within the lookahead period

    Blockers

    Any overdue Blockers within the lookahead period

    Missing Data

    Any tasks missing Publication Requirements set on the publication routine that are within the lookahead period

    Missing Data Panel


    The Missing Data Panel highlights tasks you own that are missing required info, based on the lookahead set in the publishing schedule.

    Open the Missing Data panel:

    • Open the Gantt

    • Towards the right-hand side, select

    • This will open the Missing Data Panel

    • Click into any Task Name in this panel to automatically open the specific columns you need to complete

    Blockers Panel


    The Blockers Panel highlights Open and Overdue Blockers, with Overdue ones always visible even if they fall outside the lookahead window so nothing critical gets missed.

    Open the Blockers Panel:

    • Open the Gantt

    • Towards the right-hand side, select

    • This will open the Blockers Panel

    • Click the next to the Blocker to Resolve it

    See also: Blockers

    Clashes Panel


    The Clashes Panel shows Tasks in your lookahead that share the same work area, helping you spot and resolve scheduling conflicts.

    Open the Clashes panel:

    • Open the Gantt

    • Towards the right-hand side, select

    • This will open the Clashes Panel

    • Click any Task Name in the panel to see which Task it’s clashing with, and who owns it.

    See also: Clashes

    Filter by Unresolved Issue


    Filtering by Issue lets you focus on specific Tasks based on what issues they have. It’s a quick way to review and manage work related to a particular issue across your plan.

    Filter by Issue:

    • Click and

    • Select Issue in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty or Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    • Select your from Clashes, Overdue Blockers or Missing Data in the third dropdown

    Pre-made Unresolved Issues View:

    Your Project comes with a pre-made Unresolved Issues View.

    • Click + Views within the open View Tabs

    • Select Unresolved Issues View

    See also: create & share Views

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Issue

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select

    Make Ready


    Marking your part of the plan as Ready lets your team know your Tasks are up to date and good to go for publishing.

    How to Make Ready:

    • Click your Publishing Deadline in the top right of the page

    • This will open the Make Ready Window

    • Select

    • Additionally, if you’re confident in your plan, you can still choose to Make Ready even if some issues haven’t been resolved.

      • Select Make Ready with Issues

    See also: Publishing

    Make Ready Rules
    • If you make changes to the plan after marking it as ready, it will automatically be un-readied.

    • You can only Ready Tasks that you own, and that fall within the Project’s Lookahead Period.

    Reviewing Plans


    You can assign a Reviewer to any User, ideal for reviewing Subcontractor's plans, or if someone on the Project is away. Reviewers are notified when plans are Ready and can either approve them or mark them Ready on the User’s behalf.

    To set a Reviewer:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left then select Users

    • Find the user you want to assign a Reviewer to

    • Click the + in the Reviewer column

    • Select the User you'd like to set as the Reviewer

    To mark Plans as Reviewed:

    • Click the 0/X Reviewed button in the top right of the page

    • Find the Work for Review section in the menu that opens

    • Use the to view each User's plan

    • Tick off their plan once you're ready to mark it as Reviewed

    See also: Plan Reviewer

    Project Logo

    Upload a PNG or JPEG as a Custom Project Logo to be used on PDF printouts (optional)

    External Project ID

    Custom ID used for business reference (optional)

    Project Location

    Entering a Location for a Project enables the Weather feature, and serves as the default position for any Real World Maps.

    Project Timezone

    Sets the default timezone for Planner and Diary features⁠

    Project Permissions


    Task Status

    Project Admins can control who can edit Task Status (Planned → Promised → Done).

    Task Status Permission Options
    Option
    Description

    Admins Only

    Editing Task Status is restricted to Admins Only

    Admins & Owners

    Editing Task Status is restricted to Admins and Task Owners

    Admins, Owners & Assignees

    Regress Task Status

    Additionally, if Admin & Owners, or Admins, Owners & Assignees is selected, Projects can control the direction of Status changes to make sure their commitments can't be undone.

    Regress Task Status Permission Options
    Option
    Description

    True

    All project members can regress Task Status. E.g: Planned → Promised or Done Promised → Done or Planned Done → Planned or Promised

    False

    Project Members cannot regress Task Status. Only Project Admins can. E.g Planned ← Promised or Done Promised ← Done

    Create and Manage Folders

    Project Admins can control who can edit Create and Manage Folders.

    Folder Management Permission Options
    Option
    Description

    Admins Only

    Creating and Managing Folders is restricted to Admins Only

    All Project Members

    Creating and Managing Folders can be done by Admins and Members

    *Managing Folders includes editing all properties (name, code, colour, position) and the ability to delete folders. It does not include the permission to change Folder Protection State. This will always be reserved for Admins Only.

    Create Root Folders

    Additionally, if All Project Members have permission to Create & Manage Folders, Projects can disable the option for Members to create Root Folders .

    Root Folder Permission Options
    Option
    Description

    True

    Members can create Root Folders

    False

    Members cannot create Root Folders. (Subfolders can still be created)

    Create & Manage Blockers

    Projects can control who can edit Create and Manage Blockers.

    Blocker Management Permission Options
    Option
    Description

    Admins Only

    Creating and Managing Blockers is restricted to Admins Only

    All Project Members

    Creating and Managing Blockers can be done by Admins and Members

    Managing Blockers includes editing all properties (name, category, colour, automated due date) and the ability to archive & delete Blockers.

    Create & Manage Tags

    Projects can control who can edit Create and Manage Tags.

    Tag Management Permission Options
    Option
    Description

    Admins Only

    Creating and Managing Tags is restricted to Admins Only

    All Project Members

    Creating and Managing Tags can be done by Admins and Members

    Managing Tags includes editing all properties (name, colour) and the ability to archive & delete Tags.

    Transferring Projects


    Projects can be transferred from one Organisation into a different Organisation (within the same data region).

    All data inside a transferred Project is preserved. Transferring a Project impacts the Project URL, leaving any prior URLs to Published Versions and Shared Plans invalid.

    If the users on the Project do not already exist as a User inside the Destination Org, they will be automatically invited as Standard Organisation Users.

    In order to start a Project transfer, the user initiating must be an Organisation Admin in both Organisations.

    Archiving Projects

    If a project is Archived, it is no longer accessible to any users and will not appear in the Project list. Archived Projects can be restored at any time.

    Archived Projects can be permanently deleted. All project data will be deleted without any possibility of being restored.

    Project Name

    Custom Project Name

    Product

    A specific Aphex offering such as Planner or Diary that delivers distinct functionality

    Plan

    The tier of service for a product (e.g., Planner Pro, Planner Pro+, Planner Enterprise) which determines available features and pricing

    Subscription

    A customer's purchase of a specific plan for their organisation

    Seat

    An allocation that grants a specific user access to product functionality within an organisation

    Entitlement

    The specific functionality and features a customer is entitled to use based on their subscription plan

    Organisation-Level Plans and Seats

    At Aphex, plans are selected at the organisation level, determining the feature set and functionality available to all users within that organisation. The plan also establishes the pricing for seats throughout the organisation.

    Each organisation selects:

    1. Which Aphex products they require (e.g., Planner, Diary)

    2. The appropriate plan for each product (e.g., Pro, Pro+, Enterprise)

    3. The number of seats to allocate to users within their organisation

    Seat Allocation and Control

    We understand that project teams evolve throughout delivery. Our billing approach puts customers in control of their costs by allowing them to directly manage seat allocations within their organisation.

    Customers control which users are assigned seats through the Admin Console, with billing based on occupied seats during each billing period.

    Changes to How Seats Are Assigned

    We've evolved how seats are assigned within our billing model to give customers greater visibility and control over their costs. While Aphex has always used seat-based billing, we've made an important change to how these seats are managed:

    Previous approach: Seats were automatically calculated as assigned or not behind the scenes based on project roles, with limited customer visibility or control over the assignment process.

    New approach: Customers explicitly assign seats to their users to unlock associated functionality.

    This change delivers several benefits:

    • Direct control: Organisations can now directly control which users are allocated paid seats through the Admin Console

    • Cost management: Customers can more easily manage costs by allocating seats only to users who require specific functionality

    • Multi-product clarity: As we introduce additional products, the seat allocation model provides a consistent approach across all Aphex offerings

    Subscription Types

    Flexible Plans (Monthly Billing)

    Our Flexible Plans are designed for organisations that want maximum adaptability with simple monthly billing.

    Billing Structure

    • Customers are billed monthly in advance based on the number of seats allocated at the start of each billing period

    • Seat allocation can be adjusted at any time through the Admin Console

    • Changes to seat allocations are reflected in the next billing cycle

    Subscription Changes

    • Customers may upgrade, downgrade, or cancel their subscription with notice as specified in the Terms of Service

    • Changes take effect at the next billing cycle

    Enterprise Plans

    Enterprise Plans offer predictable costs through pre-committed seat volumes or contract durations.

    Billing Structure

    • Enterprise customers agree to a fixed monthly fee that includes a specified maximum number of seats

    • A billable seat is occupied by any organisation member who has been allocated a seat in the Admin Console

    • Seat usage is monitored automatically with customers having full visibility of allocation through the Admin Console

    Overages

    • If the number of allocated seats exceeds the pre-committed amount, additional seats will be billed at the agreed overage rate

    • Overage charges are billed monthly in advance based on seats allocated at the start of each billing period

    Multiple Organisations

    • Customers who include multiple Aphex Organisations within their Enterprise plan will have their total seat usage calculated as the sum of all allocated seats across each included organisation

    • Each user occupies one seat per organisation, so if a user works across multiple organisations, they will require a seat in each

    Multiple Product Subscriptions

    As Aphex introduces new products, customers may subscribe to multiple offerings simultaneously. Each product subscription follows its own plan terms, with seats allocated independently for each product. Clear visibility of seat usage across all subscriptions is provided through the Admin Console.

    Example: How Billing Works in Practice

    ACME Contracting is managing 10 active construction projects with approximately 400 total users across these projects. They have selected:

    • Planner Enterprise: A subscription with a commitment to 400 seats (currently using 300)

    • Diary Alpha Preview: Currently in pilot phase with 50 users testing the functionality (from the available 2,500 free seats)

    In this scenario:

    • ACME pays a fixed monthly fee for their 400 committed Planner Enterprise seats regardless of current usage

    • ACME doesn't pay for their Diary usage as they're part of the Alpha Preview

    • If ACME increased their Planner seat allocation to 450, they would pay the agreed overage rate for the additional 50 seats

    • Users can be on multiple projects within ACME's organisation but only occupy one Planner seat

    Payment Terms and Currency

    Payment Terms

    • For invoice billing, invoices will be issued on Net 30 day terms and contain a reference to the Purchase Order number provided by the Customer

    • For card billing, invoices will be generated immediately upon charge

    • Payment methods and terms are established at the time of subscription and can be reviewed in the Admin Console

    Currency Options

    Aphex is headquartered in the United Kingdom, with our base pricing established in British Pounds (GBP). For the convenience of our global customers, we offer billing in select additional currencies including EUR and AUD, with plans to expand to USD in the future.

    While we aim to maintain stable pricing in all currencies, please note:

    • Pricing in non-GBP currencies is based on foreign exchange rates

    • We may periodically review and update these rates to maintain alignment with market conditions

    • We'll provide advance notice of any significant adjustments to currency-based pricing

    • Once a subscription is established in a specific currency, that currency will apply for the duration of the subscription


    For any questions regarding our Fair Billing Policy, please contact your Customer Success Manager or email [email protected].

    Support Channels and Hours

    We provide the Support Services across the various channels set out below. In order for you to receive the Support Services, you must place a request with us using either the Live Chat Support or Email Support channels set out below.

    • Help Center: Comprehensive product documentation, guides, and resources available 24/7.

    • Live Chat Support: Available between 9am and 5pm, Business Days in active support regions. Active support regions are:

      • United Kingdom (GMT); and

      • Australia (GMT+10).

    • Email Support: Available via .

    If your use of the Support Services significantly exceeds typical usage patterns, we may initiate a discussion to review and address this with you. Any changes to the Services or Fees resulting from such review will be mutually agreed upon between the Parties in writing. If the Parties are unable to mutually agree changes to the Services or Fees, we may, in our sole discretion, adjust our response times accordingly, and/or terminate the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions with 14 days' written notice to you.

    Onboarding and Activation

    We provide the following onboarding and activation services to support your implementation and adoption of the Services:

    • Implementation Support, which includes reasonable assistance with:

      • initial system configuration and setup;

      • user account provisioning and permissions;

      • data import and integration setup, where applicable; and

      • initial template and workspace configuration; and

    • Training and Enablement, which includes the provision of reasonable training sessions covering:

      • core platform functionality;

      • administrative features and controls;

      • best practices for your intended use cases; and

    together, the 'Onboarding Services'.

    Delivery Approach

    • The Onboarding Services are provided remotely, unless otherwise agreed between the Parties in writing.

    • Where required by you, we may agree to provide multiple sessions in relation to Training and Enablement. All Training and Enablement sessions will be provided at a time and date mutually agreement between the Parties, and will be aimed at your core team only.

    Service Limitations

    The Parties agree to work together to decide on a plan for the Onboarding Services. We reserve the right to limit the Onboarding Services where we consider your requests to exceed the reasonable scope of the Onboarding Services. Where we consider your use of the Onboarding Services to be excessive, we may agree to provide additional onboarding services at agreed commercial rates.

    Incident Management

    You may report errors or abnormal behaviour of the Service ("Incidents") by contacting us via the Aphex Messenger or via email at [email protected]. You agree to provide us with all information and cooperation reasonably requested by us in order for us to provide the Support Services to you. This includes, without limitation, providing the following information to Aphex regarding the Incident:

    • aspects of the Service that are unavailable or not functioning correctly;

    • an assessment of the impact of the Incident on your users;

    • start time of Incident;

    • list of steps to reproduce Incident;

    • relevant log files or data; and

    • wording of any error message.

    Our personnel will assign a priority level ("Priority Level") to each Incident and seek to provide responses in accordance with the table below.

    Priority Level
    Description
    Target Response Time

    Priority 1

    Operation of the Service is critically affected (not responding to requests or serving content) for a large number of users; no workaround available.

    2 hours

    Priority 2

    Service is responding and functional but performance is degraded, and/or Incident has potentially severe impact on operation of the Service for multiple users.

    2 days

    Priority 3

    Affects specific features or a limited set of users. Functionality is partially impacted, but a workaround may exist. Examples include single feature downtime, degraded performance for some users, or non-critical integration/data issues.

    High Priority = 2 Weeks Medium Priority = 4 Weeks

    Priority 4

    Non-critical issue; no significant impact on performance of the Service but user experience may be affected.

    Subject to clause 5, if an Incident is passed to us outside the applicable service availability window (as set out in the Support Channels and Hours section of this Support Policy), time measurement for the Target Response Time will begin from the commencement of the next service availability window.

    Exclusions

    We will have no obligation to provide Support Services to the extent an Incident arises from:

    (a) use of the Services by you in a manner not authorised in the Aphex Platform Terms and Conditions or any applicable documentation;

    (b) general Internet problems, force majeure events or other factors outside of our reasonable control;

    (c) your equipment, software, network connections or other infrastructure;

    (d) any Third Party Products or Services; and

    (e) any trial or beta software, including any Experimental Services (being any software released to the market for testing and feedback).

    Additional Resources

    To the extent that you are provided access to additional resources, including but not limited to Power BI templates (Additional Resources):

    • basic implementation guidance may be provided for standard features, at our sole discretion;

    • support does not include custom modifications or bespoke development;

    • you maintain full ownership and responsibility for any customisation; and

    • we reserve the right to modify or withdraw access to Additional Resources at any time.

    Work Area API

    This feature is only available on Pro+ or Enterprise plans

    Overview

    This endpoint provides access to the Work Areas on Published Plans for a project.

    Teams generating plans utilising Map Space Locations generate a unique related dataset of real-world work areas and schedule tasks. Teams can use this location data in any of their external GIS or analytics tools with the Work Area API.

    The Work Area API has three components.

    Authentication

    You can access the Work Area API by querying the endpoint URL for your desired project and providing a valid Token.

    Finding your API URL

    As a Project Administrator, head to your project in the Aphex Planner app. From the Integrations page, the API can be enabled.

    This will uncover the API URL specific to that project. The URL structure will be;

    Generating Tokens

    From the same location you sourced the API URL, a new Token can be created.

    Secret Token

    You cannot retrieve the token later, so be sure to save it in a secret manager. If you lose the token, you can generate a new one.

    Querying the API

    To successfully authenticate your request to the API, set the Token in the Query String of the URL.

    The example below can be used by replacing the API account ID and Token using those retrieved in the earlier step

    Data Model

    Valid requests to the API will return a JSON response consistent with the API data model.

    The Work Area API Data Model contains the following objects;

    Object
    Example

    Limits and Restrictions

    The Work Area API has a small number of restrictions and limits to ensure the availability of the system and the security of customer data.

    • Token Management Restrictions: As covered in the Authentication section, requests to the API will only succeed if they follow the correct request structure and include both a valid URL and Token. Tokens are generated individually for a Project, by a user with Project Admin rights.

    • Token Validity Limits: Generated tokens have a maximum lifespan of 3 months to ensure that over time, project data is secure by default. On expiry, or at any time, new tokens can be generated for the project.

    • Publication Limit: To maintain system availability, a Publication Limit exists for the Work Area API. Successful API requests will return up to a maximum of five (5) of the most recent Publications of data.

    User Preferences and Notifications

    User Settings

    A User's Profile stores information that makes your identity on Aphex unique, and keeps your Account secure:

    Setting
    Description

    Avatar

    Personal Date Format

    You can change your date range within Aphex to these two types :

    Type
    Format
    Used by

    Row Height Preference

    You can change the scale and spacing of Tasks on the Gantt.

    There are three options:

    Your selected Gantt scale will apply to all Projects that you view in planner, it does not change the Gantt scale for other users on the Project.

    MFA

    To add an extra layer of protection to an Aphex account, each User has the ability to enable on Multi Factor Authentication (also known as 2FA).

    This feature is available for all Users on all Aphex Subscriptions and can easily be set in the Account & Preferences menu.

    Accessible from the Security Menu, the following options are available to configure for MFA:

    • Authenticator App (like Google Authenticator)

    Email and App Notifications

    Users can control exactly what notifications they will receive via email, and find a feed of all their notifications in-app.

    Each notification will include a unique link taking users where they are needed.

    Notification
    Trigger
    Email
    In App

    * X represents the number of hours chosen for the reminder in Notification Preferences.

    Version Published notifications will only be triggered if the Publishing User elects to send a notification to Project Users.

    Users are able to unsubscribe from specific notifications and mute notifications from individual Projects in the Notifications Preferences section under User Settings.

    Clearer scaling: For larger organisations, the explicit seat management approach makes it easier to plan and budget as teams grow
  • Flexibility: Seat allocation is now disconnected from project roles, giving greater flexibility in how teams are structured

  • If ACME had a separate organisation for their Special Projects division, users working in both the main organisation and Special Projects would require seats in each

    Editing Task Status is available to Admins, Task Owners & Task Assignees

    additional sessions as reasonably required for successful adoption,

    [email protected]

    Yes

    Yes

    Ready Plan Reminder

    You have work in the lookahead and Publication target is in X hours*

    Yes

    Yes

    Review Plans Reminder

    You are the Reviewer of a user that has work in the lookahead and Publication target is in X hours*

    Yes

    Yes

    Upcoming Publishing Deadline

    Publication target is in X hours*

    Yes

    Yes

    Publish Plan Overdue Reminder

    Publication target is exceeded by 24 hours

    Yes

    Yes

    Version Published

    A new version of the plan is published

    Yes

    Yes

    Your Plan Unreadied

    A change was made to your readied plan

    Yes

    Yes

    Import Complete

    A import is completed

    No

    Yes

    New Work Assigned to You

    New tasks enter your Backlog

    Yes

    Yes

    Added to a Project or Organisation

    You are added to a new Organisation or Project

    Yes

    No

    An uploaded image of the User's choice. Will appear next to their work in the Plan.

    User Colour

    The default colour of the User's Task Bars and Work Areas.

    First / Last Name

    User's chosen First and Last Name

    Email

    User's email address attached to their Aphex account. This cannot be modified.

    ISO 8601

    DD/MM/YYYY

    UK, Europe, Australia, New Zealand

    Middle Endian

    MM/DD/YYYY

    America & Canada

    Comfy

    Large row height and text - fewer tasks and more space

    Default

    The default row height

    Compact

    Smaller row height and text - fits more work on the page

    Mentioned in a comment or note

    You were mentioned in a comment or note by other user

    Yes

    Yes

    Comments on your Work

    Another user commented on an owned or assigned Task

    Yes

    Yes

    Delay or Improvement on your Work

    Another user adds a Status on an owned or assigned Task

    2022-06-13 00:00:00+00:00

    End

    2022-06-14 00:00:00+00:00

    Duration

    2

    Shift

    day

    Owner Display Name

    Bruce Wayne

    Owner Email

    [email protected]

    Subcontractor

    Batman Ltd

    WBS Path

    12.2.3

    WBS Name

    Factories

    External ID

    Aiw9123

    Package Code

    W-203

    Package Name

    Internals

    Task ID

    2IPGEecKYBdwrpxcwXCX

    Key Task

    False

    Status

    Planned

    Notes

    Crane access at 10AM

    Fair Use Policy: The API endpoint is designed to support periodic (usually weekly) requests from projects. Use of the service outside that threatens the availability of the service for other projects could result in a suspension of the service for the offending project.

    Work Area ID

    HEntifOafSu297hg3oj8.2IPGEecKYBdwrpxcwXCX

    Location Name

    Main Site

    Location Type

    Map Space

    Task ID

    2IPGEecKYBdwrpxcwXCX

    Task Name

    Build Wall

    Authentication
    Data Model
    Limits and Restrictions

    Start

    https://app.aphex.co/work-areas/v1/<your_api_account_id>
    https://app.aphex.co/work-areas/v1/<your_api_account_id>/t/<your_token>

    Board

    Who can use this feature?

    Project Users with Full Planner Access can create and open Board Views.

    Board View gives you a whiteboard-style layout of the week ahead, automatically powered by your lookahead plan. Drag and drop Tasks, record progress, make note of a delivery - any changes you make update the schedule instantly.

    How Tasks are Grouped on Board


    Board Views can be organised into different swim lanes, depending on what type of set up you need.

    To change the Grouping:

    • Click at the top of the Board View

    • Select how you want to group tasks

    • Use ⋮⋮ to drag your Groups in the order in which you want them to be displayed

    • Tasks and Groups will reorganise automatically

    Grouping Options
    Primary Group
    Sub-Group

    Set Visible Task Properties


    Choose what Task details appear on each Task Card in Board View. Show only the properties that matter for the week and hide all the rest.

    To hide or reveal properties:

    • Click at the top left of the Board

    • Toggle any property you'd like to display on the Task Cards

    • Use the ⋮⋮ drag handles to reorder the properties on the Task Cards

    • Optionally, click the

    Recording Task Progress from Board


    Use Board to record how each day went and keep your plan up to date. Every update feeds into reporting and the wider schedule, with changes reflected instantly across all other Views.

    To record a Delay or Improvement:

    • Open and toggle Progress

    • Click the progress bar on the day you want to log an update

    • Choose to mark it on track or improved, or to record a delay

    • The progress bar will turn green or red based on the update type

    See also:

    Filtering the Board


    Filters in Aphex let you show only what matters, whether that’s Tasks with certain properties, or ones that are missing something. Keep it simple or build something more detailed, it's up to you.

    To filter a Board View:

    • Click at the top of the Board

    • In the dropdown that appears select and choose the property you'd like to filter by

    • Change the logic from options like or to or to hide or reveal the relevant Tasks

    • Click to swap between and

    See also: creating & sharing

    Filter Logic & Rules
    • All as well as can be applied as a filter

    • Archived values that are still in use will appear as filter options. Unused archived values will be hidden from the filter options

    Navigating Between Weeks


    Board View shows one week at a time, helping you focus on what's happening now, next or later.

    To change your week:

    • Locate the at the top of the Board

    • Use the < arrows > to move forward or back by a week

    Customise the Board Layout


    Tailor your Board View to suit the way you plan & communicate. Adjust the layout, colour coding, visible days of the week and more.

    To colour code Task Cards on Board:

    • Click

    • Select Card Colour

    • Pick from Owner, Subcontractor or Shift

    To change the visible days:

    • Click

    • Select Days

    • Pick from 5 Day, 6 Day or 7 Day

    To switch the Board Layout:

    • Click

    • Select Layout

    • Pick between Waterfall or Masonry

    See also:

    Board View Options
    Layout
    Description
    Colour
    Description

    Create & Edit Tasks on Board


    To drag and drop Tasks on Board:

    • Change dates: Drag task to a different day

    • Reorder: Drag task up or down in its group

    • Reassign: Drag task between groups

    To edit a Task on Board

    • Click on any visible Task Property

    • Pick a different option from the dropdown that opens

    • Changes are automatically saved

    To Create a Task on Board:

    • Click the in the bottom left-hand corner.

    • Complete the Task Details

    • Click to add it to the plan


    Board Scale

    Changing the Board Scale lets you choose how much of the week you want to focus on.

    To zoom in on Board:

    • Locate in the bottom right-hand corner

    • Choose between Zoom or Fit

    Scale Options
    Scale
    Description

    Blockers

    Who can use this feature?

    Task Owners, Assignees and Admins can add Blockers to their Tasks, and Resolve Blockers.


    All Project members can Create & Manage the Blockers Library by default. This can be changed to Admins only in the Project Settings.

    Blockers help you surface, monitor & resolve anything that needs to happen before a Task can start (or finish). Use them to stay on top of permits and sign-offs to stop delays before they occur. Add due dates, get visibility on what’s overdue, and tick things off once they’re sorted.

    Creating Blockers


    Set up a library of Blockers that can be used across the Project. Give each Blocker a name, category, and an optional due date rule so deadlines stay in sync automatically as the plan evolves.

    To create a new Blocker type

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Blockers from the menu

    • Click

    • Configure your Blocker by entering a name, selecting a category, choosing a colour & setting an optional

    Blocker Categories

    Blockers can be assigned to a category that aligns with their type:

    Blocker Type
    Due Date Rules
    • If a Blocker Asset has a Due Date rule set, the Blocker’s Due Date will be applied automatically when added to a Task, based on the Task’s start or end date.

    • You can edit or remove the Due Date at any time.

    Assigning Blockers to Tasks


    One or more Blockers can be assigned to a Task at any time.

    To assign Blockers:

    • On the Gantt, use the Column Picker to enable the Blockers column

    • Click the Blocker cell for your Task and choose a Blocker type from the dropdown

    • The Blocker will be added to the Task with a status of Open or Overdue depending on its Due Date settings

    To override or reset the Due Date:

    • On the Gantt, use the Column Picker to enable the Blockers column

    • Click into the Blocker cell

    • Select the ... next to the relevant Blocker

    See also:

    Blocker Status

    Blockers always hold 1 status out of Open, Overdue or Resolved.

    Blocker Status
    Description

    Finding Overdue Blockers


    Overdue Blockers are the early warning signs of delay. Whether you're clearing your own list or reviewing risk across the plan, it's easy to surface overdue Blockers and get ahead of what's slipping.

    To see Overdue Blockers from the Gantt:

    • On the Gantt, open the menu in the top right

    • Toggle Show Overdue Blockers

    • Task Bars with Overdue Blockers will now be marked with an next to them

    To see a list of all Overdue Blockers:

    • Click the icon to open the Blockers Panel

    • A list of all Overdue Blockers and associated Tasks will appear

    Overdue Blockers form part of an owner’s Unresolved Issues - items they need to clear before Making Ready, ahead of the weekly Published Version deadline.

    See also:

    Resolving Blockers


    Mark a Blocker as Resolved so your team knows that it has been actioned.

    To Resolve a Blocker:

    • Navigate to the Blocker Task Cell or double click on the Task Gantt bar to open it

    • Click the next to the Blocker to Resolve it

    • A date stamp is added to the Task history to indicate when it was marked as Resolved

    View all Blocker information


    The Blockers Panel gives you a focused view of everything that’s overdue or upcoming. Filter to see just your own Blockers or the full Project list. You’ll see due dates, task names, and a live view of anything at risk of causing delays - with quick access to resolve things as they’re sorted.

    To open the Blockers Panel:

    • Open the right hand panel

    • Click the icon to open the Blockers Panel

    • Blockers will be listed and grouped by Blocker Type

    • Click the to resolve a Blocker directly from the list

    See also:

    Blocker Summary


    Switch to Summary Mode to get a traffic-light view of each Task. Strip all the Blocker information back to just see a quick count of Blockers, colour coded by status.

    Turn on Summarise Blockers from Board:

    • On Board, open the menu

    • Locate Blockers and select the >

    • Toggle Summarise Blockers

    Turn on Summarise Blockers from the Gantt:

    • On the Gantt, use the Column Picker to enable the Blockers column

    • Hover over the column name & click the ...

    • Toggle Summarise Blockers

    Summary Icon meanings
    • Open Blockers appear orange

    • Overdue Blockers appear red with an exclamation point

    • Resolved Blockers appear green with a tick & the text struck through

    Filter by Blocker


    Filter by Blocker type to focus on Tasks needing a specific permit or sign-off, or by Blocker Status to see what’s still Open, Overdue, or Resolved.

    To set a Blocker Filter:

    • Click and

    • Select Blockers in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty or Is Not Empty

    To Filter by Blocker Status:

    • Click and

    • Select Blocker Status in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is or Is Not

    See also: create & share

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Materials

    Who can use this feature

    Admins can create and manage Materials


    All project users can add Materials to their Tasks and log actuals

    Materials can be added to Tasks to forecast your daily resource demand and track planned vs actual quantities.

    Creating Materials


    Creating Materials lets you build a reusable library of Materials to assign to Tasks.

    Creating New Materials:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Materials from the menu

    • click

    • Create your custom Material resource by entering the name, unit, Material type and colour

    Material Type

    Each material needs a Material Type from one of the following categories:

    Material Type
    Material Unit

    Each material needs a Material Unit from one of the following categories:

    Material Unit

    Assigning Materials


    Assigning Materials to tasks helps plan how much is needed for each one, making it easier to manage demand across your project.

    To add Planned Materials to a task:

    • On the Gantt, navigate to the column picker and toggle Materials

    • Click the Material cell for your task & select Materials from the dropdown menu

    See also:

    Material Property Rules
    • Materials are a multi-select property

    • A Quantity of the Material can be inputted when adding Materials to tasks

    • Quantities are applied per day

    Editing Planned Daily Quantities


    When you add a planned Material, Aphex spreads the total amount across the Task’s planned days. If you expect to use more or less of a material on a certain day, you can adjust the daily quantity to match.

    To adjust the daily planned quantities:

    • Double-click your task bar on the Gantt to open the right-hand panel

    • Scroll down to Planned Resources and click to expand your chosen Material

    • Click into the Quantity box and change the value

    Material Actuals


    Material tracking doesn't just stop at forecasting demand. Use Actuals to log what was used each day, directly on the Task - giving you a clear picture of performance over time, and use the inputs to automatically generate planned vs actual quantity reports.

    Adding Actuals to Tasks:

    • Double-click your task bar on the Gantt to open the right-hand panel

    • Scroll down to Actual Materials and click to expand your chosen Material

    • Click and select a planned material

    • Pick a day to record the Actual against, enter the Quantity and click to confirm

    View Forecasted Materials on the Gantt


    Use the Resource Overlay in the Gantt to forecast Material demand day by day. You'll see how much of each Material is needed across the project, with a clear breakdown of which Tasks are driving that usage and who's using it.

    View the Resource Overlay by Material:

    • Click and select Resources and click Material

    • Hover over the numbers to view your Total and Project Utilisation

    • Click to filter to a specific Material type

    See also:

    What's Shown on Hover

    On hover, the daily breakdown includes:

    • Utilisation

      • Quantity of Material used by Tasks in your current View (respects filters)

    Resource Overlay Configuration Options
    Option
    Function

    Filter by Material


    Filter by Material to quickly review and manage work related to a particular Material items across your plan.

    Filter by Material:

    • Click and

    • Select Material in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty or Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    See also: create & share

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Report on Planned vs Actual Material


    Once Materials have been assigned to Tasks, all updates (including Delays, On Track & Improvement events) can be traced back to each Subcontractor. This makes it easy to understand how each Subcontractor is performing across the project.

    Power BI

    Connect your Project as a datasource for Power BI to report on Material Demand, and track Planned vs Actuals.

    Aphex Insight

    Utilise Aphex Insight to track Material Demand. See trends and drill down into specific Tasks to identify where each Material Resource is allocated.

    See also:

    Progress Updates

    Who can use this feature?

    Admins, Task Owners and Assignees can add Progress Updates to Tasks.

    Progress Updates can be recorded to represent any delays and improvements made to a Task over time. As the plan progresses the team can log updates to keep the plan accurate and allow for a deeper understanding of the leading causes of delay and who's responsible.

    Adding Delays to Tasks


    Delays can be added to any day of a Task to show it's no longer on track to finish as planned. Just hit the Thumbs Down, choose a Delay Reason, log the days of impact and add optional comments or photos. It'll update the schedule automatically ad start building your delay history. Delays can be added to a Task from anywhere in the project, but let's start by looking at recording a Delay from List View.

    To Delay a Task from List View:

    • Open a List View

    • Click on the Task card

    • Configure your delay by selecting a Delay Reason, impact type, days of impact, comments, images and

    Delay Types
    Type
    Description

    Progress Update Data

    For each working day of a Task, Progress Updates can be recorded to indicate performance. Each Progress Update includes the following data:

    Progress Update Property
    Description

    Adding Improvements to Tasks


    Use the Thumbs Up to mark a Task as On Schedule. You can log that work went ahead as planned or even ahead of schedule, and optionally pull the end date in if things are moving faster than expected. Improvements can be added to a Task from anywhere in the project, but let's start by looking at recording one from List View.

    To Improve a Task from List View:

    • Open a List View

    • Click on the Task card

    • Configure your On Schedule or Shorten event by selecting an impact type, days of impact, comments,

    Positive Impact Types
    Name
    Description

    Delaying Promised Tasks


    Changing the dates of a Promised Task will automatically trigger a Progress Update. Changing the dates of Promised Tasks in a chain will trigger an option to apply Progress Updates to other Tasks that are Promised in the chain.

    To delay a promised Task:

    • Update the end of a Promised Task

    • Configure your Delay by selecting a Delay Reason, impact type, days of impact, comments, images and record date

    • If you have additional Promised Successors, choose Yes to apply the same delay to the linked Tasks

    • Select No

    See also:

    Progress Update Visualisation


    When a Progress Update is added, the Task Colour for that day will change to show the Progress Update added for that day. Red represents a Delay and green represents On Track or Shortened.

    To see Progress Updates from the Gantt:

    • Open

    • Make sure that Show Progress Updates is enabled

    • Days with delays turn red

    • Days that are On Track or Improved turn green

    View the Delay History of a Task


    Each Task keeps a running record of delays, improvements and updates - including who made the change, when it was logged and what the impact was.

    To see the log of all Task Progress Updates:

    • Right Click a Task and select View Details

    • Click the icon to open the Activity Log

    • See a chronological list of all Delays and Improvements added to the Task over time

    See also:

    Deleting Progress


    If a delay or improvement was logged by mistake, it can be removed from the Task. The original event itself will still be visible in the Task's activity log as a past record, but the delay & impact will not count on the Task any longer.

    Delete a Progress Update:

    • Open the Task in the right-hand panel and click

    • Hover over the Progress Update and click the ...

    • Click Delete

    Deleting Progress rules
    • Deleting Progress will not impact the dates of the task, however it does delete the record and will not appear in any reporting.

    • The Progress Update Visualisation from the Task bar will be removed and the activity log stricken out.

    Create Custom Delay Reasons


    Creating Delay Reasons lets you build a reusable library of Delay Reasons to add when adding a delay to Tasks.

    Creating a new Delay Reason:

    • Open the Delay Reasons page, then click

    • Create your custom Delay Reason by entering a name and selecting a category

    Delay Categories

    Each delay reason needs to belong to one of the following categories:

    Delay Categories

    Filter by Delay Reason


    Once Delays have been logged, you can filter any View to show Tasks impacted by specific Delay Reasons - or simply highlight all Tasks that have recieved any Delay at all.

    Filter by Delay Reason:

    • Click and

    • Select Delay Reason in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty and Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    See also: create & share

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Report on Delays


    As the team starts to record delays against Tasks, all updates (including Delays, On Track & Improvement events) can be traced back to the responsible Task Owner or Subcontractor. This makes it easy to understand how all parties are performing across the project.

    Power BI

    User Power BI to build custom reporting on delays and performance, based on data in your weekly Published Versions. Aphex provides free templates as a starting point but everything can be customised to suit your project reporting requirements.

    Aphex Insight

    Utilise Aphex Insight to track Delay Concentration by Delay Reason. See trends and drill down into specific Tasks to identify which Delay Reason has the highest delay concentration.

    See also:

    Publishing

    Who can use this feature?

    Project Admins can configure the publishing routine, publish the plan for the project and enable Share to Web.


    All Project users can open Published Versions, and copy the public URL.

    Publishing takes a snapshot of your plan at a specific moment. It’s great for sharing, keeping the team aligned, or using as a baseline to compare progress.

    Set up the Publishing Routine


    Creating a publication routine lets you set recurring deadlines for task updates, helping keep the whole project team aligned and on track.

    Setup a Publishing Routine:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left and select Publishing

    • Click the settings icon in the top right

    • Configure the Publishing Routine by setting a Lookahead Period, Publication Frequency, and Publication Requirements

    How the Publishing Routine Works
    • Setting a Publication Frequency triggers notifications to all Task Owners that they need to Ready their plan before the deadline each week

    • Adds a Due Date above the Gantt, counting down till when you're expecting to create the next Published Version

    Publishing Routine Settings
    Option
    Function

    Check if the Plan is ready to Publish


    Before publishing, check that your team has updated their part of the plan and that there are no outstanding issues. When you're ready, just hit ‘Publish’, you can do this anytime, even if some team members haven’t marked their work as ready.

    Check the Plan:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left and select Publishing

    • Click into the Next Scheduled Publication

    • Check the user table to see if the team have readied/reviewed their plan, if they have any Clashes, Overdue Blockers or Missing Data

    See also:

    Publishing the Plan


    Once you're happy with the plan, Publishing takes a snapshot of it at that exact moment in time. Published Versions are shared with everyone on the project and stored as a historical record - capturing how the plan looked, week by week.

    How to Publish the Plan:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left and select Publishing

    • Click into the next scheduled publication

    • Select Publish in the top right

    • A menu will appear with a summary of the data you're about to Publish

    How Publishing Works
    • Published Versions include all project data, not just the lookahead or Made Ready tasks.

    • You can publish at any time, even if teams haven’t marked their work as ready or it’s not the Target Date.

    Publishing Automations


    During the Publishing process, Automations let you optionally set historic tasks to ‘Done’, locking them in place or mark Tasks within a set window as ‘Promised’. A Promised Line will appear on the Gantt to show where commitments end, helping track delays and their impacts.

    To Mark Historic Tasks as Done:

    • Open your upcoming Published Version and click

    • Toggle Set Historic Tasks to Done

    To set a Promised Period:

    • Open your upcoming Published Version and click

    • Toggle Promise Tasks

    • Pick a date for the Promised Period to end

    To send a notification:

    • Open your upcoming Published Version and click

    • Toggle Send Notification

    See also:

    How Publishing Automations Work
    Property
    Description

    Compare the Live Plan to a Published Version


    Compare the live plan with any Published Version to see how things have moved. Spot where Tasks have slipped or improved as the plan progresses.

    To turn on a Published Version Baseline:

    • Click at the top off the Gantt

    • To compare the Live Plan to a previous week, select Baseline

    • This will show a list of all Published Versions on the Project

    • Select any option to see how how your current plan compares to your Baseline

    Open Published Versions


    You can open any historical Published Version to view the full plan exactly as it was at the time of publish. It’s fully interactive so you can use filters, open Task Details, view the Map - just like the live plan. The only difference is that everything is read-only, like an interactive PDF.

    Open a Published Version:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left and select Publishing

    • Locate the list of all Published Versions in your Project

    • Hover over an existing published version and click ...

    • Select

    See also:

    What’s Not Included in a Published Version

    Everything in the Live Plan is mirrored in the Published Version, aside from a fey key exceptions:

    Not Included

    Shared Published Versions


    Published Versions can be Shared to Web to allow anyone (including non-Aphex users) to view the plan.

    Enable sharing:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left and select Publishing

    • Locate the list of all Published Versions in your Project

    • Hover over an existing published version and click ...

    • Toggle on

    Controlling Public Data
    • At any time, Admins can turn Share to Web off. This will mean no-one can access any data via the Shared URL.

    Included Data (optional)
    Information shared

    Map

    Who can use this feature?

    Project Users with Full Planner Access can create and open Map Views.

    Map View gives you a visual way to track work on site. Use it for daily coordination, spotting clashes, creating automatic staging diagrams, or to walk others through what’s happening; where, when & who. Maps can be simple floor plans or real-world maps with coordinates, and can connect to external layers like GIS data or drone imagery.

    Every Task on the Map is tied to the schedule, so when the plan moves, the Map automatically updates too.

    Labour & Plant

    Who can use this feature?

    All project users can add Labour and Plant to their Tasks.


    Project Admins can create new Labour and Plant resources.

    Labour and Plant can be added to Tasks to track and forecast your daily resource demand.

    Relationship Links

    Who can use this feature?

    Task Owners, Assignees and Admins can add relationship links between tasks

    Relationship Links in Aphex allow you to establish task dependencies, ensuring tasks are completed in the correct order. Whether you need tasks to start together, finish together, or follow one another, Relationship Links help keep your project on track and aligned.

    Cookie Policy

    This Cookie Policy explains how Aphex (collectively "Aphex", "we", "us", and "ours"), use cookies and similar technologies to recognize you when you visit our websites, including without limitation , and help.aphex.co, and any related URLs, mobile or localized versions and related domains / sub-domains ("Websites"). It explains what these technologies are and why we use them, as well as the choices for how to control them.

    Cookies, similar technologies and the processing of personal data

    Task Properties

    A Task in Aphex is more than just a name and a date - this doc breaks down the core elements that make each Task functional, and who has the permission to edit them.

    Task Properties


    Tasks properties are the details and metadata that can be assigned to Tasks.

    Shift

    Shift

    Location

    Location

    Assignee

    Assignee

    None

    >
    beside the property to open more options
  • Use the to hide specific values within that property from view

  • Tasks that do not match the filter criteria will be hidden from the Board

    Subcontractor

    The colour of the Tasks allocated Subcontractor

    Shift

    The colour of the Task Shift

    Owner

    The user colour of the Task Owner

    Day
    Description

    5 Day

    Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday

    6 Day

    Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday

    7 Day

    Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday

    • Relationship links can also be hidden or displayed by toggling the property on and off in the View Options menu.

      • Relationship links will be turned off when grouping by assignee.

    Owner

    Folder

    Package

    Owner

    Folder

    Subcontractor

    Masonry

    Tasks are condensed into the smallest amount of vertical space

    Waterfall

    Each row contains only one task

    Zoom

    Days remain in a fixed size, and scrolling adjusts the visible portion.

    Fit

    Days are condensed to fit within the available space.

    Progress Updates
    Views
    Task Properties
    Unresolved Issues
    Print Board

    Subcontractor

    Automated Due Date
  • The Blocker is added to the library of Blockers the team can assign to their Tasks

  • Other Permit

    N / A

    Overriding the Due Date will lock it to a specific date. It will no longer update automatically if the Task’s dates change.
  • Resetting the Due Date will restore the dynamic behaviour: updating automatically based on the Task’s dates and the original Due Date rule.

  • Select Set Due Date
  • Pick a new Due Date from the calendar, or select Reset Due Date to re-apply the Blocker Due Date rule to the Task

  • Use the to choose which Blockers to display

  • Change the Owner dropdown from My Tasks to All Tasks to view Blockers across the entire project

  • Toggle Overdue Blockers only on or off to switch between seeing just overdue Blockers or all open and overdue Blockers for Tasks in your current view

  • See the Blockers Summary for each Task

    See the Blockers Summary for each Task

  • Select your desired Blocker Type in the third dropdown

  • Pick from Open, Overdue or Resolved in the third dropdown

    Design

    Safety

    Environmental

    External Stakeholder

    Quality

    Open

    The Blocker has a Due Date that lies anywhere from Today and into the future. Blockers without Due Dates also hold the Status of Open

    Overdue

    The Blocker has a Due Date that lies anywhere from Yesterday and into the past

    Resolved

    Blockers

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select

    Blocker Status

    Is Is Not

    Multi-Select

    Bulk Edits
    Make Ready
    Export Blockers
    Views

    Resource

    The Blocker has manually been marked as completed by a Project User

  • The Material is added to the library of Materials the team can assign to their Tasks

  • Steel

    Other

    Tonnes

    Tons

    Yards

    Yards Squared

    Yards Cubic

  • The unit quantity is split across the task's duration

    • Archived Material resources will no longer be available to add to tasks but will still exist on tasks it was assigned to before the resource was archived

    Click the Resources Configuration icon to switch between Tasks in View and Project Utilisation

  • Hover over to see the daily breakdown

  • # of Tasks

    • Number of Tasks in your current View using that Material on the selected day (respects filters)

  • Project Utilisation

    • Total quantity used across the entire project (ignores filters)

  • # no of Project Tasks

    • Number of Project-wide Tasks using that material on the selected day (ignores filters)

  • Task Owner Breakdown

    • Lists each Task Owner contributing to Project usage

    • Includes Task Count and percentage of total utilisation for that day and Material

  • Cell shading

    • Darker = higher quantity

    • Lighter - lower quantity

    • Scale is relative to the values shown in the current overlay

  • Quantity values are only shown in Day View

    • In Week, Month or Year mode, cell shading remains but numeric values are hidden

  • Select your desired Material item in the third dropdown

  • Concreate

    Piles

    Earthworks

    Roadworks

    Electrical

    Item

    Metres

    Metres Squared

    Metres Cubic

    Kilometers

    Total

    The demand for tasks in your current view

    Project Utilisation

    The demand for your entire project

    Hide Un-utilised resources

    Removes resources that aren’t assigned to any Tasks from the resource list

    Material

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select

    Bulk Edits
    Export Material Demand
    Views
    Connect to Power BI

    Drainage

    Kilograms

    record date

    Reason for the change. This can be configured by each project individually and typically contains reasons such as "Awaiting Access".

    Amount

    Impact of the update is recorded in a Value that represents a duration in working days (+ or -)

    Amount by

    User who recorded the update

    Created at

    Timestamp of when the update was recorded

    images
    and
    record date
    to only apply the delay to the specific Task you edited

    The Net Delay Number is shown as a on the end of the Task Bar

    Safety

    Scope Change

    Submittals and Approvals

  • Select your desired Delay Reason in the third dropdown

  • Extend

    A task’s end date has been delayed from the prior plan or commitment

    Move

    A tasks's start and end date has been moved (pushed later)

    Date

    Selected working day to record the event against

    Type

    Delayed On Schedule Improved

    On Schedule

    A task’s end date is confirmed as achievable.

    Shorten

    A task’s end date has been improved (brought earlier).

    Move

    A tasks's start and end date has been moved (brought earlier)

    Delay Categories

    Environmental

    Inadequate Planning

    Insufficient Resources

    Prior Work

    Delay Reason

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-select

    Promised Tasks
    Activity Log
    Views
    Connect to Power BI

    Reason

    Quality

    Teams typically set the Publishing Frequency to align with their weekly planning meetings. E.G if your Lookahead meeting is on a Friday, set the Publishing Deadline for Thursday at 5pm so you can ensure all Task Owners have updated their plans ahead of the meeting, and so that you can create the offical weekly Publish in time for the session

    The timezone for the project

    Frequency

    A recurring target for when users should create a new Published Version.

    Publication Requirements

    Set specific fields which are required for publishing. As users update their plans these will flag as missing data if fields are left incomplete.

    Decide if you're happy to Publish or if more updates are needed first
  • Select when you're ready to create the weekly version

  • Versions are created manually; they won’t be published automatically on the Target Date.
  • Each version is numbered by default (e.g. Published Version 1), but you can rename them at any time.

  • Creating a Version adds it as a historical record within the Project.

  • View Version

    Milestone Summary Panel

    Board View

    List View

    Share to Web
  • Optionally toggle Include Baselines or Include Progress Updates

  • Copy the URL and share with anyone

  • Progress Updates

    Allow guests to see all Progress Updates (delays & improvements) recorded on tasks

    Lookahead Period

    The lookahead period is the window of time where all plans are expected to be kept up to date.

    Publication Frequency

    Projects set a recurring target for when users should create a new Published Version.

    Time

    The time of the next Publication deadline.

    Promise Tasks

    Tasks will be promised up to the date set. Promised Tasks will require statuses when editing their dates.

    Set Historic Tasks to Done

    All Tasks prior to the Publication Date (Today) will have their Status set to ‘Done’. This will lock Progress Updates and Start & End Dates. Task Status can be changed at any time.

    Send Notification

    All users added to the Project Users list will receive an email with a link to the most recent Published Version

    Clashes

    Documents

    Comments

    Saved Column Configs

    Blocker Summary Panel

    Baselines

    Allow guests to see all historic baselines from previous versions and imports

    Make Ready
    Task Status
    Print Published Versions

    Timezone

    Open a Map View

    Each Project can have multiple Maps. From static Site GAs to geolocated Maps - pick the one you want to view and work with. You'll only see Tasks linked to that Map.

    To open a Map View:

    • Click + Views at the top of the View Tabs

    • Scroll through Views you & your team have created, or Views Aphex has provided

    • Open any Map View

    To change which Map you're viewing:

    • Open any Map View

    • In the top left, open the Map Selector

    • Click into the Map you want to open

    See: Locations and Printing the Map

    Set the Date Range


    Use the Date Picker to show what's happening on site for a certain day, week, month or custom range.

    To choose what time frame you want to see on the Map:

    • Click the Date Range at the top of the Map

    • Pick one of the shortcuts: Today, Next Week, This Month or use the calendar to select a specific date range

    • Use the < arrows > to move forward or back in time

    Date Range Options
    Option
    Function

    Lookahead

    Current Week + (Project Lookahead Period - 1 Week)

    Today

    Today’s Date

    This Week

    Monday to Sunday of the Current Week

    Organise the Task List


    The Task List on Map Views can be organised into different groups, depending on what type of set up you need.

    To change the Grouping on Map:

    • Click at the top of the Map View

    • Select how you want to group tasks

    Grouping Options
    Primary Group
    Sub-Group

    Owner

    Folder

    Package

    Owner

    Folder

    Subcontractor

    Interact with Tasks on the Map


    Clicking a task on the Map will open its full details in a panel, right on top of the Map. You can view, update or progress the Task without moving away from your current view.

    To open a Task on the Map:

    • Click any Task Card from the section on the left hand-side

    • Or, click the Work Area on the Map and then the icon

    • The Task Panel will open

    To record Task Progress from the Map:

    • Click the Work Area on the Map to open the Task Preview

    • Click any of the Progress Bars, underneath any of the current or past Task Days

    • Select or

    • Record the delay

    See also: Progress Updates

    Show or Hide External Map Layers


    You can toggle external map layers on or off to bring in additional site context, like utilities, drone flyovers, or design information, without crowding the Map view when they’re not needed.

    To turn Map Layers on or off:

    • Open a Map View

    • Click into the tab in the left-hand panel

    • Use the to turn Layers on and off

      • Toggle individual sublayers for more detailed control

      • Hold SHIFT then Click to turn multiple on and off at once

    To switch the base map:

    • Open a Map View

    • Click into the tab in the left-hand panel

    • Swap between Satellite, Street or None

    See also: Add Map Layers

    Colour Code the Map


    You can change how Work Areas are colour-coded on the map to reflect what matters most during planning. Switch between colours for Task Owner, Subcontractor, or Shift, or choose to highlight Clashes and Overdue Blockers in red when you need to spot issues quickly.

    To change the colour of Work Areas:

    • Click and select Work Area Colour

    • Pick from Subcontractor, Owner or Shift

    To highlight Clashes or Blockers on the Map in red:

    • Click and select Highlight Issues

    • Pick from Clashes or Overdue Blockers

    Filter the Map


    Filters in Aphex let you show only what matters, whether that’s Tasks with certain properties, or ones that are missing something. Keep it simple or build something more detailed, it's up to you.

    To filter a Map View:

    • Click at the top of the Map

    • In the dropdown that appears select and choose the property you'd like to filter by

    • Change the logic from options like or to or to hide or reveal the relevant Tasks

    • Click to swap between and

    See also: Saving a View

    Filter Logic & Rules
    • All as well as can be applied as a filter

    • Archived values that are still in use will appear as filter options. Unused archived values will be hidden from the filter options

    • Tasks that do not match the filter criteria will be hidden from the Map

    Create Labour Resource

    Creating Labour resource lets you build a reusable library of Labour to assign to Tasks.

    To create Labour:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Labour from the menu

    • Click

    • Create your custom Labour resource by entering the Name, Labour Type and a Colour

    • The Labour resource is added to the library of Labour the team can assign to their Tasks

    Labour Types
    Labour Types

    Individual Resource

    Crew

    Create Plant Resource


    Creating Plant resource lets you build a reusable library of Plant to assign to Tasks.

    To create Plant:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Plant from the menu

    • Click

    • Create your custom Plant resource by entering the Name, Plant Type and Colour

    • The Plant resource is added to the library of Plant the team can assign to their Tasks

    Plant Type
    Plant Types

    Access Equipment

    Backhoe

    Compacting Equipment

    Concrete Placement

    Concrete pumps

    Cranes

    Assign Labour Resources to Tasks


    You can assign as many Labour resources to each Task as you need. Once added to the task, they’re assumed to be needed for the entire working duration - keeping things simple and helping teams plan ahead.

    To add Labour to a Task:

    • On the Gantt, navigate to the column picker and toggle Labour

    • Click the Labour cell for your Task & select the relevant Labour option from the dropdown menu

    • Use the + / - buttons to increase or decrease the Labour quantity needed for the duration of the Task

    See also: Bulk Edits

    Assign Plant Resources to Tasks


    You can assign as many Plant resources to each Task as you need. Once added, they’re assumed to be needed for the entire working duration - keeping things simple and helping teams plan ahead.

    To add Plant to a Task:

    • On the Gantt, navigate to the column picker and toggle Plant

    • Click the Plant cell for your Task & select the relevant Plant option from the dropdown menu

    • Use the + / - buttons to increase or decrease the Plant quantity needed for the duration of the Task

    See also: Bulk Edits

    Plant & Labour Property Rules
    • Labour & Plant are multi-select properties

      • You can assign multiple types of labour or plant to each Task

      • Each assigned item can have its own quantity

    • Quantities are applied per day

      • A quantity of 5 means 5 units are required for each day of the Task's duration

      • Quantities cannot vary across the days of a Task

    • Archived Labour & Plant resources will no longer be available to add to Tasks but will still exist on tasks it was assigned to before the resource was archived

    View Forecasted Resources on the Gantt


    Use the Resource Overlay in the Gantt to forecast Labour & Plant demand day by day. You'll see how much of each Labour or Plant is needed across the project, with a clear breakdown of which Tasks are driving that usage and who's using it.

    To turn on the Labour Resource Overlay

    • Click and select Resources

    • Use the icons on the left to view Labour

    • Hover over the numbers to view your Total and Project Utilisation

    • Click to filter to either Crew or Individual Resource

    • Click the Resources Configuration icon to switch between Tasks in View and Project Utilisation

    • Hover over to see the daily breakdown

    To turn on the Plant Resource Overlay

    • Click and select Resources

    • Use the icons on the left to view Plant

    • Hover over the numbers to view your Total and Project Utilisation

    • Click to filter to a specific Plant Type

    • Click the Resources Configuration icon to switch between Tasks in View and Project Utilisation

    • Hover over to see the daily breakdown

    See also: Export Resource Demand

    What's Shown on Hover

    On hover, the daily breakdown includes:

    • Utilisation

      • Quantity of Material used by Tasks in your current View (respects filters)

    • # no of Tasks

      • Number of Tasks in your current View using that Material on the selected day (respects filters)

    • Project Utilisation

      • Total quantity used across the entire project (ignores filters)

    • # no of Project Tasks

      • Number of Project-wide Tasks using that material on the selected day (ignores filters)

    • Task Owner Breakdown

      • Lists each Task Owner contributing to Project usage

      • Includes Task Count and percentage of total utilisation for that day and Material

    • Cell shading

      • Darker = higher quantity

      • Lighter - lower quantity

      • Scale is relative to the values shown in the current overlay

    • Quantity values are only shown in Day View

      • In Week, Month or Year mode, cell shading remains but numeric values are hidden

    Resource Overlay Configuration Options
    Option
    Function

    Total

    The demand for tasks in your current view

    Project Utilisation

    The demand for your entire project

    Hide Un-utilised resources

    Removes resources that aren’t assigned to any Tasks from the resource list

    Filter by Labour


    Filter by Labour to quickly review and manage work related to a particular Labour item across your plan.

    Filter by Labour:

    • Click and

    • Select Labour in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty, Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    • Select your desired Labour item in the third dropdown

    Filter by Plant


    Filter by Plant to quickly review and manage work related to a particular Plant item across your plan.

    To filter by Plant:

    • Click and

    • Select Plant in the first dropdown

    • Select from Is, Is Not, Is Empty, Is Not Empty in the second dropdown

    • Select your desired Plant item in the third dropdown

    See also: create & share Views

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Labour

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select

    Plant

    Is Is Not Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-Select

    Report on Labour and Plant Demand


    Power BI

    Connect your Project as a datasource for Power BI to report on Labour & Plant Demand.

    Aphex Insight

    Utilise Aphex Insight to track Labour & Plant Resource Demand. See trends and drill down into specific Tasks to identify where each Labour and Plant Resource is allocated.

    See also: Connect to Power BI

    Drawing Relationship Links

    You can draw links directly on the Gantt - just click and drag from one bar to another. The link type is set based on where you start and end. It’s quick, visual, and often the easiest way to build out your logic as you go.

    How to Draw a Relationship Link:

    • Hover over the Predecessor Task Bar and click the

    • Click and drag from the predecessor to the successor

    • Release the mouse to automatically create the relationship.

    Link Type and Direction
    Direction
    Visual
    Explainer

    Start > Start (SS)

    The second task starts when the first task starts.

    Start > Finish (SF)

    The second task finishes when the first task starts.

    Scheduling Behaviour
    • Moving a driving task will reschedule all dependent successors in the chain

    • Tasks won’t lose their link logic - rescheduling respects the original structure

    • Updates happen in real time as you adjust dates, add delays or drag bars on the Gantt

    Linking Multiple Tasks


    Checkboxes let you select multiple Tasks and build logic between them all at once. Set the sequence, adjust the link type & lag, and apply. It’s the fastest way to build out a full section of your plan.

    To Link Multiple Tasks:

    • Hover over tasks and click

    • Click the Link icon in the multi-select toolbar

    • Choose the link type (SS, SF, FS, FF), add any lag if needed and confirm

    Link Search


    If the Task you want to link to isn’t visible, drop your link on the blue search icon. A menu will open so you can quickly search and select the right Task without changing your filters or losing your place.

    How to Link Tasks using the Link Modal:

    • Hover over the Predecessor Task and click the

    • Click and drag to

    • The Link Search Modal will appear. Use the search bar or filters to find the task you want to link

    • Select the task, choose the link type, and apply the relationship

    Creating Links from a Specific Task


    When you open a Task, you’ll see a full list of its linked Tasks including Link Type, Lag and Float/Driving. From here, you can make changes or add new relationships; no dragging or switching views required.

    Adding a Relationship Link from the Task Panel:

    • Open the Task Panel for the task you want to link.

    • Scroll to Related Tasks and click

    • The Link Search Menu will appear. Use the search bar or filters to find the task you want to link.

    • Select the task, choose the link type, and apply the relationship.

    Add or Remove Lag


    Lag lets you add a space between linked Tasks, helping account for handovers, wait times, or real-world gaps without shifting tasks manually. As you adjust Tasks, Aphex gives you a quick visual cue showing how much lag you’ve just added or removed.

    Add Lag to Relationship Links from the Gantt:

    • Use the Task Bar, or Start and End properties to edit the dates of the successor Task

    • The Lag Change Indicator appears, showing the number of lag days added or removed

    Add Lag to Relationship Links from the Task Panel:

    • Open the Task Panel for the Task you want to link.

    • Scroll to Related Tasks and click into the Lag field and enter a value

    Add Lag to Relationship Links from the Link Modal:

    • On the Gantt, click a Link Line

    • In the Link Modal, click into the Lag field and enter a value

    • Select to apply the Lag change to the relationship

    Lag Rules
    • The Predecessor Task Calendar is used to determine lag when added to a relationship link

    • When drawing Links on the Gantt, Aphex automatically applies zero-day lag, snapping the successor to come immediately after the predecessor

    • Hold Shift while drawing the link to keep the existing gap - Aphex will automatically calculate and apply the right lag to preserve the spacing between tasks

    • The Lag Change Indicator will be visible on the Gantt for a few seconds after the change is applied

    Identifying Driving Tasks


    Each relationship between Tasks shows whether it’s Driving or how much Float it has. A Driving relationship means the predecessor has zero float - any change to it will move the successor. Links with float display how much flexibility exists before the successor is affected. These values update automatically as Task dates, link type, or lag change, helping you see which parts of the schedule are fixed and which still have room to move.

    To reveal Driving Tasks & Float from the Gantt:

    • Click any relationship link on the Gantt - single or multiple

    • In the Link Menu that opens, Driving Tasks are marked with

    • Links that aren’t driving display their Float Value

    How Driving Tasks & Float are calculated
    • Float is the amount of time a predecessor task can move without delaying its successor

    • It’s calculated automatically using the start and finish dates of both tasks, the relationship type, and any lag that exists between them

    • When Float = 0, the predecessor is considered Driving - any change to it will immediately shift the successor’s dates

    • When Float > 0, the predecessor is non-driving and has flexibility before it impacts the successor

    • Float and Driving values update dynamically whenever task dates, relationship types, or lag are changed

    Example

    • Predecessor task finishes on: 1 September

    • Successor task starts on: 6 September

    • Lag: 1 day

    • Assume all days are working days

    Step-by-step:

    • Days between 1 Sep and 6 Sept (inclusive): 5 days

    • Float = 5 - 0 - 1 = 4 days

    The predecessor has 4 days of float. It can finish as late as 5 September without delaying the successor

    Editing & Breaking Links


    You can edit or break existing relationship links at any time to update or remove connections between Tasks.

    How to edit an existing Link:

    • On the Gantt, click a Link Line

    • In the Link Modal that opens, you can either:

      • edit the Link Type (FS, SF, FF, SS)

      • edit the Lag

    • Click to apply edits to the relationship

    Breaking Relationship Links:

    • On the Gantt, click a Link Line

    • In the Link Modal that opens, click Remove Link

    Understanding Scheduling Behaviour


    Understanding scheduling behaviour helps you predict how linked tasks behave when dates change based on whether they're Planned, Promised, or Done. It’s the key to controlling movement, Ripple Status, and Progress Updates in your plan.

    • Successor is Planned:

      • Both tasks reschedule freely.

      • Successor follows any changes to the Predecessor.

    • Successor is Promised or Done:

      • Successor won’t move.

      • Only the Predecessor shifts.

    • Successor is Planned:

      • Successor moves freely and reschedules based on new Predecessor date.

    • Successor is Promised:

    • The task is locked. You can’t move it.

    • Any changes must start from its Successors.

    See also: Task Status

    We may process personal data about you when we use cookies or similar technologies, for example, your IP address, username, unique identifier, or an email address. Where we do so we will only process your personal data in compliance with our Privacy Policy.

    What are cookies?

    Cookies are small data files that are placed on the browser on your computer or mobile device when you visit a website and use its functions, or use an app. Cookies are widely used by online service providers to facilitate and help to make the interaction with users faster and easier (by helping us to distinguish between you and other users and enabling us to retrieve things like your settings and preferences), as well as to provide reporting information and facilitate online advertising.

    Cookies set by Aphex on the Websites are called "first party cookies". Cookies on the Websites set by parties other than Aphex are called "third party cookies". Third party cookies enable third party features or functionality to be provided on or through the Websites (e.g. advertising, interactive content and analytics).

    Why do we use cookies?

    We use first party and/or third party cookies on our Websites for various purposes such as:

    • to facilitate the operation and functionality of our Websites;

    • to improve your experience of our Websites and make navigating around them quicker and easier;

    • to allow us to make a bespoke user experience for you and for us to understand what is useful or of interest to you;

    • to analyze how our Websites are used and how best we can customize them;

    • to identify future prospects and personalize marketing and sales interactions with them;

    What type of cookies do we use and what are they used for?

    We use the following types of cookies in our Websites:

    Essential Cookies

    We use essential cookies to make our Websites work. These cookies are strictly necessary to enable core functionality such as security, network management, your cookie preferences and accessibility. Without them you wouldn't be able to use basic services. You may disable these by changing your browser settings, but this may affect how the Websites function.

    Performance and functionality cookies

    These cookies are used to enhance the performance and functionality of our Websites but are non-essential to their use. However, without these cookies, certain functionality like videos may become unavailable or you would be required to enter your login details every time you visit the Websites as we would not be able to remember that you had logged in previously.

    Marketing cookies

    These account-based marketing cookies enable us to identify future prospects and personalize sales and marketing interactions with them.

    Analytics and customization cookies

    These cookies collect information that is used to help us understand how our Websites are being used or how effective our marketing campaigns are, or to help us customize our Websites for you.

    We use cookies served by Google Analytics to collect limited data directly from end-user browsers to enable us to better understand your use of our Websites. Further information on how Google collects and uses this data can be found at: https://www.google.com/policies/privacy/partners/. You can opt-out of all Google supported analytics on our Websites by visiting: https://tools.google.com/dlpage/gaoptout.

    Advertising cookies

    These cookies collect information over time about your online activity on the Websites and other online services to make online advertisements more relevant to you. This is known as interest-based advertising. They also perform functions like preventing the same ad from continuously reappearing and ensuring that ads are properly displayed for advertisers.

    Cookie List

    Here is a list of the cookies we use on our Website and why:

    Provider
    Description

    Essential and Performance Management

    Aphex

    In session service delivery critical tracking of events and state.

    Wix

    Required cookies for delivering the website (not active on app.aphex.co)

    Segment

    App performance tracking.

    We may use other similar technologies too, like web beacons, tags, pixels, clear gifs, caching and local browser storage.

    Cookies are not the only way to recognize or track visitors. We may use other, similar technologies from time to time, like web beacons (sometimes called "tracking pixels" or "clear gifs"). Their function is to provide us with statistical information about site traffic and how people navigate through our site, as well as to facilitate marketing and interest-based advertising. Web beacons are typically transparent graphic images placed on a site. Web beacons are used in combination with cookies to measure the actions of visitors on websites and so declining cookies will impair their functioning. We and our marketing and advertising partners may use web beacons to obtain information such as the URL of the page on which the beacon appears, the time the page containing the beacon was viewed, and the type of browser used to view the page.

    We may also use web beacons in marketing emails sent by our system. If you receive the HTML formatted version of such emails and your email is configured to download images, a record of whether or not you open the email (and, if you open the email, how frequently you open it) will be saved with your subscriber history. Your engagement with the content of the communication (such as which links you click on) will also be recorded.

    We also use caching and local storage in your browser to store personalization settings such as your language and which tabs you were last viewing inside our product. This allows us to enhance your experience and resume sessions where you left off.

    We may use this information to give us an indication of the popularity of content and to help us make decisions about future content and formatting. We may also use the information to publish more content relevant to users in future issues and to unsubscribe recipients who haven't opened our emails for a period of time.

    Third party cookies

    Some cookies that have been set on our Websites are not set on a first party basis by Aphex. The Websites can be embedded with content from third parties to serve advertising. These third party service providers may set their own cookies on your web browser. Third party service providers control many of the performance and functionality, advertising, marketing and analytics cookies described above. We do not control the use of these third party cookies as cookies can only be accessed by the third party that originally set them.

    For a list of third party cookies used refer to the lists above.

    Controlling cookies and similar technologies - E.U users

    You can set and change your preferences, at any time.

    Blocking, disabling cookies and similar technologies

    Wherever you're located you may also set your browser to block cookies and similar technologies, but this action may block our essential cookies and prevent our website from functioning properly, and you may not be able to fully utilize all of its features and services. You should also be aware that you may also lose some saved information (e.g. saved login details, site preferences) if you block cookies on your browser. Different browsers make different controls available to you. Disabling a cookie or category of cookie does not delete the cookie from your browser, you will need to do this yourself from within your browser, you should visit your browser's help menu for more information.

    Targeted advertising

    You can opt-out of interest-based advertising facilitated by the cookies on our Websites by opting out of advertising cookies. In addition, you can opt-out of interest-based advertising from participating members of the following advertising industry associations:

    • Network Advertising Initiative

    • Digital Advertising Alliance (website ads) or youronlinechoices.com (if you are in Europe)

    • Digital Advertising Alliance (ads in mobile apps)

    Not all companies that serve targeted ads participate in these opt-out programs, so even after opting-out, you may still receive some cookies and interest-based advertisements from other companies. If you opt-out of targeted ads, you will still see advertisements online but they may be less relevant to you.

    You can also use your mobile device settings to limit use of the advertising ID associated with your mobile device for interest-based advertising purposes.

    You will need to apply all of the settings described above on each device on which you want the settings to be applied.

    Updates to this Cookie Policy

    We may update this Cookie Policy from time to time in order to reflect, for example, changes to the cookies we use or for other operational, legal or regulatory reasons. Please therefore re-visit this Cookie Policy regularly to stay informed about our use of cookies and related technologies.

    The date at the top of this Cookie Policy indicates when it was last updated.

    If you need further information

    If you have any questions about our use of cookies or other technologies, please email us at [email protected].

    www.aphex.co
    www.app.aphex.co
    Property
    Description
    Property Type
    Mandatory

    Unique identifier automatically assigned to every Task in the plan. Non-editable.

    String

    Users who can help to edit and update a Task

    Multi-Select

    Tick-off items that need to be completed before a task proceeds or finishes

    Multi-Select

    Task Permissions


    Permission
    Owner / Admin
    Assignee
    No Task Role

    Delete Task

    Duplicate Task

    Add Subtasks

    Printing

    Who can use this feature

    All Project users are able to print from the Project.


    Guests and Non-Aphex Users are able to print Shared Published Versions.

    Print the Gantt, Map, Board, and List views to capture exactly what you see on screen. Aphex will print configured overlays, grouping and tasks from your current view.

    Print Gantt View


    Print to PDF the live Gantt to share the most up-to-date view of your plan.

    To print the Gantt:

    • Open a Gantt View

    • Set your Filters, Date Range, Columns, and other View Settings to match how you want your output to look

    • Click and select Print View to open the Print Menu

    • From the Print Menu, you can make further adjustments to the Date Range

    Advanced settings
    Setting
    Description

    Print Map View


    Print to PDF your Map View as a staging-diagram flipbook or a single page with all your Tasks and Work Areas mapped out.

    To print the Map:

    • Open a Map View

    • Set your Filters, Date Range, and other View Settings to match how you want your output to look

    • Click and select Print View to open the Print Menu

    • Position the map and click

    Advanced settings
    Setting
    Description
    Sequencing Outputs
    Sequence
    Output

    Print Board View


    Print to PDF the Board View for a quick, whiteboard-style snapshot of the week ahead.

    To print Board:

    • Open a Board View

    • Set your Filters, Group By, and other View Settings to match how you want your output to look

    • Click and select Print View to open the Print Menu

    • Select your Page Size

    Advanced Settings
    Setting
    Description
    Board Print Size

    Print List View


    Print to PDF the List View to get a clear, daily to-do list of upcoming work.

    To print List:

    • Open a List View

    • Set your Filters, Group By, and other View Settings to match how you want your output to look

    • Select the Page Size

    • Click to download the PDF to your device

    Advanced Settings
    Setting
    Description
    List Print Size

    Print Published Versions


    Need a hard copy of your published plan? You can print to PDF a published version to share a snapshot of the project exactly as it was at the time it was published.

    To Print the Published Gantt:

    • Open the Published Version

    • Click and select Print Gantt

    • Select the Date Range you want to print, page size, and optionally toggle

    • Click to view more printing options

    Advanced settings
    Setting
    Description

    To Print the Published Map:

    • Open the Published Version

    • Click and select Print Map

    • Position the map and click

    • Optionally and select from Day

    Advanced settings
    Setting
    Description
    Sequencing Outputs
    Sequence
    Output

    Printing Errors


    Notifications appear during loading to keep you informed of progress and potential delays.

    Processing Print

    This is taking longer than normal due to external layers

    A Print with Loaded Data button will appear and allow you to generate a print with the data that has already loaded. Your printout will show a Data partially loaded label beside the timestamp to show that the loading process was stopped before completion

    Processing Print Failed

    Internal Server Error - please try running your print again

    This could be an issue with Aphex’s printing server. Please try your print again after a short wait, or get in touch with support if the error persists

    Memory Timeout - reduce the amount of data you're printing or run your print in batches

    This means that the generated PDF was too large to load. Please try reducing the date range, sequencing frequency, or map layer quantity

    Network Issue - please contact your IT team/network team to check our printer functions have access

    This is a connection issue that could be caused by a poor wifi signal or an internal firewall blocking our print server. Please get in touch with your IT team to troubleshoot

    get tasks

    get

    Get tasks

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    projectIdanyRequired

    projectId

    Query parameters
    startanyOptional

    YYYY-MM-DD formatted date

    finishanyOptional

    YYYY-MM-DD formatted date

    shiftanyOptional

    day | afternoon | night | 24hr

    ownerIdsanyOptional

    comma-delimited user IDs

    folderIdsanyOptional

    comma-delimited folder IDs

    packageIdsanyOptional

    comma-delimited package IDs

    locationIdsanyOptional

    comma-delimited location IDs

    calendarIdsanyOptional

    comma-delimited calendar IDs

    subcontractorIdsanyOptional

    comma-delimited subcontractor IDs

    assignedToIdsanyOptional

    comma-delimited user IDs

    fieldsanyOptional

    comma-delimited additional fields (assignees,wbs,package,parent,contractor,labourResources,plantResources,materialResources,location,workArea,progress,predecessors,successors,externalId,notes)

    Header parameters
    get
    /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/tasks

    generate token

    post

    Generate token

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    Body
    clientIdstringOptional
    clientSecretstringOptional
    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    404

    Not Found

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    post
    /{region}/v1/auth/token

    revoke token

    post

    Revoke token

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    Body
    clientIdstringOptional
    clientSecretstringOptional
    tokenstringOptional
    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    Responsestring
    404

    Not Found

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    post
    /{region}/v1/auth/token/revoke

    get users

    get

    Get users

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    projectIdanyRequired

    projectId

    Header parameters
    X-API-KeyanyRequired

    access token

    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    Responseall of
    401

    Unauthorized

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    get
    /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/users

    get subcontractors

    get

    Get subcontractors

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    projectIdanyRequired

    projectId

    Header parameters
    X-API-KeyanyRequired

    access token

    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    Responseall of
    401

    Unauthorized

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    get
    /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/subcontractors

    get folders

    get

    Get folders

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    projectIdanyRequired

    projectId

    Header parameters
    X-API-KeyanyRequired

    access token

    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    Responseall of
    401

    Unauthorized

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    get
    /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/folders

    get packages

    get

    Get packages

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    projectIdanyRequired

    projectId

    Header parameters
    X-API-KeyanyRequired

    access token

    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    Responseall of
    401

    Unauthorized

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    get
    /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/packages

    get calendars

    get

    Get calendars

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    projectIdanyRequired

    projectId

    Header parameters
    X-API-KeyanyRequired

    access token

    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    Responseall of
    401

    Unauthorized

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    get
    /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/calendars

    get locations

    get

    Get locations

    Path parameters
    regionanyRequired

    gb | au

    projectIdanyRequired

    projectId

    Header parameters
    X-API-KeyanyRequired

    access token

    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    Responseall of
    401

    Unauthorized

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    get
    /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/locations

    Marketing cookies

    Google Analytics

    Tracking of prospects and behaviour for site improvement and retargeting (website only - not active on app.aphex.co).

    Segment

    Tracking of prospects and behaviour for site improvement and retargeting.

    Analytics and customization cookies

    Segment

    User behaviour and app use tracking for service improvement.

    Google Analytics

    User behaviour and app use tracking for service improvement.

    Logrocket

    Session and issue tracking for performance optimisation and user support (active on app.aphex.co only)

    Advertising

    Linkedin

    Retargeting to users after they leave Intercom's websites.

    Calendars

    Working and non-working days of a Task

    Single Select

    Comments

    Thread of communication on the Task, with @mentions of other users.

    Mentions

    Documents

    Documents that can be uploaded and attached to Tasks

    File

    Duration

    Duration in working days. Minimum duration of 1 day.

    Numeric

    End Date

    End date

    Date

    External ID

    A custom unique identifier used to connect a task to an external plan, this commonly represents an Activity ID in a master schedule

    String

    Folder

    Structure used to group and organise Tasks in the plan. Typically represents the Project WBS.

    Single Select

    Labour

    Human resources required to deliver the Task

    Multi-Select

    Location

    Visual map of an on-site location of the Task, or description of the off-site location

    Single Select

    Materials

    Material resources required to deliver the Task

    Multi-Select

    Name

    Name given to the Task

    String

    Notes

    Additional notes that can be attached to Tasks

    Free text

    Owner

    User responsible for the Task

    Single Select

    Package

    Custom way of grouping related Tasks in the plan

    Single Select

    Parent

    Parent Task of a Subtask

    Single Select

    Plant

    Equipment and machinery required to deliver the Task

    Multi-Select

    Related Tasks

    Predecessors and Successors. Relationships can exist between Tasks in the form of Logic Links

    Multi-Select

    Shift

    Used to label if work is scheduled during the Day, Afternoon, Night or All.

    Single Select

    Start

    Start date

    Date

    Subcontractor

    Subcontractor responsible for delivering the Task

    Single Select

    Status

    The overall state of a Task

    Single Select

    Tag

    Custom labels used to group, filter, or track tasks across your Project

    Multi-Select

    Target Date

    Milestone Target Date

    Date

    Work Area

    Physical location of a Task on-site, marked-up on a Map

    Mark Up

    Update Task Links

    Update Task Dates, Duration, Calendar and Shift

    Update Task Blockers

    Update Task Tags

    Update Task Subcontractor, Labour, Plant and Materials

    Update Task Location and Work Area

    Update Task Parent

    Update Package

    Update Folder

    Update External ID

    Mark as Non-Conflicting

    Convert to Milestone

    Update Target Date

    Update Task Owner

    Update Task Assignees

    Add Task Comment

    Update Task Notes

    Update Task Documents

    Update Task Status

    Update Material Actuals

    Record Progress Update

    Activity ID
    Assignee
    Blockers

    Next Week

    Next Monday to Sunday (1 week into the Future)

    Custom

    Custom dates selected by the user

    Advance Selected Range

    Move the date range forwards and backwards by your selected range

    Subcontractor

    Shift

    Shift

    None

    Dozers

    Dumper

    Earthmoving Equipment

    Excavators

    Forklifts

    Graders

    Lifting Equipment

    Marine Equipment

    Other

    Painting and Coating Equipment

    Piling Equipment

    Piling Rigs

    Rollers

    Small or Hand Tools

    Tipper Lorrys (20 Tonne)

    Trucks and Lorries

    Wheeled Loaders

    X-API-KeyanyRequired

    access token

    Responses
    200

    OK

    application/json
    Responseall of
    401

    Unauthorized

    application/json
    422

    Unprocessable Entity

    application/json
    500

    Internal Server Error

    application/json
    {
      "accessToken": "text",
      "expiresIn": "text",
      "tokenType": "text"
    }
    text
    POST /{region}/v1/auth/token HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Content-Type: application/json
    Accept: */*
    Content-Length: 41
    
    {
      "clientId": "text",
      "clientSecret": "text"
    }
    POST /{region}/v1/auth/token/revoke HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Content-Type: application/json
    Accept: */*
    Content-Length: 56
    
    {
      "clientId": "text",
      "clientSecret": "text",
      "token": "text"
    }
    {
      "paging": {
        "next": {
          "after": "text",
          "link": "text"
        }
      },
      "results": [
        {
          "displayName": "text",
          "email": "text",
          "id": "text"
        }
      ]
    }
    {
      "paging": {
        "next": {
          "after": "text",
          "link": "text"
        }
      },
      "results": [
        {
          "id": "text",
          "name": "text"
        }
      ]
    }
    {
      "paging": {
        "next": {
          "after": "text",
          "link": "text"
        }
      },
      "results": [
        {
          "code": "text",
          "id": "text",
          "name": "text",
          "parentId": "text",
          "path": "text"
        }
      ]
    }
    {
      "paging": {
        "next": {
          "after": "text",
          "link": "text"
        }
      },
      "results": [
        {
          "code": "text",
          "id": "text",
          "name": "text"
        }
      ]
    }
    {
      "paging": {
        "next": {
          "after": "text",
          "link": "text"
        }
      },
      "results": [
        {
          "id": "text",
          "name": "text",
          "type": "five-day"
        }
      ]
    }
    {
      "paging": {
        "next": {
          "after": "text",
          "link": "text"
        }
      },
      "results": [
        {
          "id": "text",
          "name": "text",
          "type": "map"
        }
      ]
    }
    GET /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/users HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Accept: */*
    
    GET /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/subcontractors HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Accept: */*
    
    GET /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/folders HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Accept: */*
    
    GET /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/packages HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Accept: */*
    
    GET /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/calendars HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Accept: */*
    
    GET /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/locations HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Accept: */*
    
    {
      "paging": {
        "next": {
          "after": "text",
          "link": "text"
        }
      },
      "results": [
        {
          "assignedTo": [
            {
              "displayName": "text",
              "email": "text",
              "id": "text"
            }
          ],
          "calendar": {
            "id": "text",
            "name": "text",
            "type": "five-day"
          },
          "duration": 1,
          "externalId": "text",
          "finish": "text",
          "folder": {
            "code": "text",
            "id": "text",
            "name": "text",
            "parentId": "text",
            "path": "text"
          },
          "id": "text",
          "keyTask": true,
          "labour": [
            {
              "id": "text",
              "name": "text",
              "quantity": 1
            }
          ],
          "location": {
            "id": "text",
            "name": "text",
            "type": "map"
          },
          "materials": [
            {
              "dailyActual": [
                {
                  "date": "text",
                  "quantity": 1
                }
              ],
              "dailyPlanned": [
                {
                  "date": "text",
                  "quantity": 1
                }
              ],
              "id": "text",
              "name": "text",
              "quantity": 1,
              "unit": "text"
            }
          ],
          "name": "text",
          "notes": "text",
          "owner": {
            "displayName": "text",
            "email": "text",
            "id": "text"
          },
          "package": {
            "code": "text",
            "id": "text",
            "name": "text"
          },
          "parent": {
            "id": "text",
            "name": "text"
          },
          "plant": [
            {
              "category": "text",
              "id": "text",
              "name": "text",
              "quantity": 1
            }
          ],
          "progress": [
            {
              "amount": 1,
              "date": "text",
              "name": "text",
              "type": "delay"
            }
          ],
          "relatedTasks": [
            {
              "id": "text",
              "lag": 1,
              "name": "text",
              "relation": "predecessor",
              "type": "start-start"
            }
          ],
          "shift": "day",
          "start": "text",
          "status": "planned",
          "subcontractor": {
            "id": "text",
            "name": "text"
          },
          "workArea": {
            "bbox": [
              1
            ],
            "geometry": null,
            "id": null,
            "properties": {
              "ANY_ADDITIONAL_PROPERTY": "anything"
            },
            "type": "text"
          }
        }
      ]
    }
    GET /{region}/v1/projects/{projectId}/tasks HTTP/1.1
    Host: app.aphex.co/
    Accept: */*
    
    You’ll get a Ripple Status prompt.
  • Optionally apply the delay to the Successor.

  • Successor is Done:

    • Successor won’t move. Only the Promised Predecessor shifts.

  • Finish > Start (FS)

    The second task starts when the first task finishes.

    Finish > Finish (FF)

    The second task finishes when the first task finishes.

    ,
    Page Size
    , and optionally toggle
  • Click to view more printing options

  • Click to download the PDF to your device

  • To Include/Exclude the Footer at the bottom of the page

    Logo

    The PDF can be generated with either the Organisation Logo, or the Project's logo.

    Print Size

    A0

    A1

    A2

    A3

    Optionally and select from Day, Week or Month

  • Click for additional printing options, like adding extra columns to the output

  • Click to download the PDF to your device

  • To Include/Exclude the Footer at the bottom of the page

    Logo

    The PDF can be generated with either the Organisation logo, or the Project's logo.

    Map Print Page Size

    A0

    A1

    A2

    A3

    &
    Layout
  • Click to view more printing options

  • Click to download the PDF to your device

  • A0

    A1

    A2

    A3

    A3

    A4

    Click to download the PDF to your device

    The PDF can be generated with either the Organisation logo, or the Project's logo.

    Gantt Print Size

    A0

    A1

    A2

    A3

    ,
    Week
    or
    Month
  • Click for additional printing options

  • Click to download the PDF to your device

  • To Include/Exclude the Footer at the bottom of the page

    Logo

    The PDF can be generated with either the Organisation logo, or the Project's logo.

    Print Size

    A0

    A1

    A2

    A3

    Delay Data

    Delay data includes Progress Update colours, Done & Promised bars and Delay icons.

    Bar colour

    Pick from either Owner, Subcontractor or Shift for the Bar Colour on the Gantt print. Owner will be selected by default.

    Group Dates & Durations

    Select whether to print Filtered or Total Start Dates, End Dates, and Durations for Folders, Packages, and Parent Tasks. This lets you control whether your printout shows only visible tasks or the whole group span.

    Work Area Colour

    Pick from either Owner, Subcontractor or Shift for the Bar Colour on the Gantt print. Owner will be selected by default.

    Show Clashes

    To Include/Exclude clashes in the print.

    Column Data

    Up to three additional data points can be shown next to their tasks on the Map Print.

    Day

    A new page for each working day. Only tasks taking place on the specific day will appear on the page.

    Week

    A new page for each week. Only tasks taking place within the specific week will appear on the page.

    Month

    A new page for each month. Only tasks taking place within the month week will appear on the page.

    Include footer

    To Include/Exclude the Footer at the bottom of the page

    Logo

    The PDF can be generated with either the Organisation logo, or the Project's logo.

    Include footer

    To Include/Exclude the Footer at the bottom of the page

    Logo

    The PDF can be generated with either the Organisation logo, or the Project's logo.

    Bar colour

    Pick from either Owner, Subcontractor or Shift for the Bar Colour on the Gantt print. Owner will be selected by default.

    Group Dates & Durations

    Select whether to print Filtered or Total Start Dates, End Dates, and Durations for Folders, Packages, and Parent Tasks. This lets you control whether your printout shows only visible tasks or the whole group span.

    Include footer

    To Include/Exclude the Footer at the bottom of the page

    Work Area Colour

    Pick from either Owner, Subcontractor or Shift for the Bar Colour on the Gantt print. Owner will be selected by default.

    Show Clashes

    To Include/Exclude clashes in the print.

    Column Data

    Up to three additional data points can be shown next to their tasks on the Map Print.

    Day

    A new page for each working day. Only tasks taking place on the specific day will appear on the page.

    Week

    A new page for each week. Only tasks taking place within the specific week will appear on the page.

    Month

    A new page for each month. Only tasks taking place within the month week will appear on the page.

    Network Troubleshooting

    Include footer

    Include footer

    Logo

    Include footer

    Master Schedule Import

    Project Admins can run Master Schedule Imports.

    Bring selected parts of your Master Schedule into Aphex using XER, XML, or MPP files from P6, Asta, or MS Project. Import only the activities your team needs - this helps seed the lookahead plan with the right level of detail or key Milestones - just enough for the team to breakdown, adjust and build from.

    Upload your File


    The first step is to upload your file.

    To upload your XER, XML or MPP file:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left

    • Select Master Schedule Import from the dropdown menu

    • Click

    • Upload your File

    Prepare your file before exporting

    Filter (Optional)

    UDFs allow you to filter to the specific data you want to import into Aphex:

    Filter your Import Scope


    Choose exactly which Tasks to bring into Aphex. Use a custom field (like a UDF in P6) to flag only the relevant Tasks you want to import; for example, bringing in Construction activities while skipping Design or Procurement.

    To filter what Tasks are imported into Aphex:

    • Click the Column dropdown and select the UDF column you want to filter by

    • Click the Value dropdown and choose the value you want to import

    • Click

    Select your Date Range


    Importing your schedule in smaller timeframes helps keep things tidy. Most projects avoid bringing in the entire long-range plan at once. By importing just what's needed for the next stage, then running regular imports (e.g. monthly) to add the next few weeks as the project moves forward, you give the team relevant, up to date data they can build from.

    To select a Date Range

    • Select from Next 4 Weeks, Next 12 Weeks, All Future, All Past and Future

    • Click

    Rules for New vs Existing Tasks
    • Only Tasks that match your chosen filter and fall within the selected date range will be considered for import.

    • You’ll see a count of how many new Tasks will be imported, based on your selection.

    Smart Checks for Unsupported Data & Variance Detection


    To keep Aphex simple & intuitive, some Master Schedule features aren’t supported. During import, you’ll be prompted to make smart decisions about how to handle things like actual dates, or LoE / WBS Summary Bars that don’t translate 1:1. This helps ensure Tasks still land on the dates they’re supposed to.

    Check Unsupported Task Types

    If your Import file contains WBS Summaries or Level of Effort (LoE) Tasks, you can choose how to handle these tasks.

    For WBS Summaries, you can choose to:

    • Ignore them from the import so they will be excluded.

    Please note that you will only see the steps that apply to your Import. If your Import doesn't contain Unsupported Task Types, Driving Predecessors, Actual Dates or Milestones, it will skip these steps.

    Automatically set Milestone Target Dates


    Milestones in your file will always be imported as Milestones in Aphex. You can also choose to set the imported Milestone date as a Target Date - this gives you a stable benchmark to compare against, so you can easily see how the Milestones in the short-term plan are tracking against your baseline or contract dates.

    Make a selection from:

    • Set Milestone Target Date from the imported Dates

    • Do nothing

    • Click

    Target Date Creation
    • All Milestones in your file will be created as Milestones in Aphex.

    • Target Dates are automatically set to the Milestone’s end date on import. You can update these later if needed.

    Bring in your WBS & Other Properties


    Map the right data across. Task names, logic, and calendars come through automatically, but you can also import WBS structure, assign Owners, Notes, Locations, or Subcontractors based on your UDFs, and bring over key metadata that helps delivery teams plan faster.

    Map Folders

    • To import your current WBS into your Project's Folder tree, select the WBS option from the Folder Code drop-down list.

    Map Other Aphex Properties

    • Additionally, you can also import Subcontractor, Location, Owner and Notes, if you've predefined these in your source tool before exporting.

    Asset Creation & Mapping Rules
    • Only data associated with activities you are importing will be included. i.e Folder codes unrelated to any imported activities will not be brought into Aphex.

    • If a Folder code already exists in the project, imported activities with that code will be grouped into the existing Folder, even if the Folder names don’t match.

    Complete & Review your Import


    This is your final review before Tasks are imported into the Project. You'll see a summary of what's about to be created, including Task counts & any new assets. If any changes were made during the process, you can download a CSV to review the modifications. Nothing has been created yet - confirm when you're ready.

    To complete the import

    • Review the data you're importing

    • Download the skipped tasks, folders or modifications CSV

    • Select

    What Aphex Creates Automatically
    • Calendars are created if a Task uses a calendar that doesn’t already exist in the project.

      • This includes all custom working calendars, with their non-working days, RDOs, and exception rules (e.g. site shutdowns, public holidays).

    Skipped & Modified CSV Format

    Key columns in both files typically include:

    • ID

    • Name

    Add Imported Tasks to the Plan


    Before your newly imported work appears on the Gantt, your next step is to distribute tasks to the team. Then, once tasks have been assigned to an owner, the user will be notified that they have newly imported work waiting for them to add to the plan.

    1

    Assign Ownership

    Tasks

    Who can use this feature?

    Any Project User with full Planner Access can create Tasks. Task Owners, Assignees and Admins can edit Tasks.


    Task Owners and Admins can delete Tasks.

    When you add a Task, you can customise its properties to reflect exactly what’s being done, by who, and when, making sure the plan communicates clearly to anyone who needs to see it.

    Tasks can store everything from planned resource quantities and work areas to subcontractor assignments and permit requirements. This way, as your plan changes, not only does everything reschedule automatically, but things like resource forecasts, staging diagrams and daily task-lists update on the spot.

    Creating Tasks


    You can create Tasks from wherever you’re working - from the Gantt, from the Board, or imported from another source. For an easy start, try adding them directly inside your Folder structure.

    To create a Task:

    • On the Gantt, find the Folder where you want the Task to live

    • Select at the bottom of the group

    • Your new Task will appear as a line item within that Folder, ready to edit

    Task Creation Rules
    • By default:

      • The user who creates the task is set as the Owner

    Task Types

    There are four Task types that you can create:

    • Task

    • Parent Task

    See also:

    Editing Tasks


    Tasks can be edited at any time; whether you're refining the plan, making updates as work progresses, or finalising details for the as-built record. You can update Tasks one by one or in bulk. Let's look at making edits across a selection of Tasks.

    To edit multiple Tasks:

    • Use the to select all Tasks you want to update

    • Hold Shift on your keyboard to quickly select everything in between

    • Once selected, the multi-select toolbar will appear at the bottom of the Gantt

    • Click the to open the list of properties to edit - pick the one you want to change

    See also: editing via

    Task Selection Rules
    • Subtasks can only be multi-selected with others from the same Parent

    • You can’t mix Parents and Subtasks in the same selection

    • You can select any Task in the project

    Drag & Drop Tasks


    Drag-and-drop Tasks on the Gantt to easily adjust the start and end dates.

    To move a Task Bar:

    • Hover over the Task Bar on the Gantt

    • Drag either end of the Task Bar to extend or shorten its Duration

    • Drag the middle to shift the entire Task forward or backward in time

    Creating Parent & Subtasks


    Subtasks work just like regular Tasks, with all the same properties, but are nested inside a Parent Task. They’re ideal for breaking down higher-level activities, especially when importing from a Master Schedule, while keeping a clear link back to the source activity.

    To breakdown a Task:

    • Hover over the Task you want to break down

    • Click

    • Hover over Add Subtasks

    • Enter the number of Subtasks you want to create

    Subtasks can only go one level deep (Parent → Subtask). If you need more structure, it's best to use Subfolders to build out your plan.

    See also:

    Inherited Parent & Subtask Properties

    Parents & Subtasks will always have the same:

    • Owner

    • External ID (often mapped from the P6 Activity ID)

    Parent Task Bar & Dates

    Parent Start Date = Start date of the earliest visible Subtask

    Parent End Date = End date of the latest visible Subtask

    These values update automatically when filters or date range settings are applied.

    See more about

    Moving Subtasks to a Different Parent Task


    Subtasks can be moved from one Parent Task to another, as long as a few conditions are met.

    To move a Subtask:

    • Click the column picker towards the top left of the Gantt

    • Toggle on the Parent column

    • Click into the cell for the Subtask you want to move

    • Select the new Parent Task from the list

    Requirements for Moving Subtasks
    • The destination Parent Task must already be broken down (with at least one Subtask)

    • Both Parent Tasks must be Owned by the same User

    Duplicating Tasks


    To duplicate multiple Tasks:

    • Use the to select all Tasks you want to duplicate

    • Hold Shift on your keyboard to quickly select everything in between

    • Once selected, the multi-select toolbar will appear at the bottom of the Gantt

    • Click to duplicate all selected Tasks

    To duplicate an individual Task:

    • Hover over the Task Name

    • Select

    • Select Duplicate

    Duplicated Task Rules
    • Tasks can be duplicated by any User who holds a Task Role

    • All Task properties will be duplicated automatically, excluding:

    Deleting Tasks


    To delete multiple Tasks:

    • Use the to select all Tasks you want to delete

    • Hold Shift on your keyboard to quickly select everything in between

    • Once selected, the multi-select toolbar will appear at the bottom of the Gantt

    • Select

    To delete an individual Task:

    • Hover over the Task Name

    • Select

    • Select Delete Task

    Deleting Tasks Rules
    • Deleted tasks can’t be restored unless you undo the action during the same session

    • Only the Task Owner, an Owner Delegate, or a Project Admin can delete a Task

    Copying Tasks Between Projects


    If you have multiple Aphex Projects, you may want to move Tasks & assets from one to another. We'll show you how.

    To Copy Tasks into a different Project:

    • Use the to select all Tasks you want to copy

    • Hold Shift on your keyboard to quickly select everything in between

    • Once selected, the multi-select toolbar will appear at the bottom of the Gantt

    • Click the and select Copy to an Aphex Project

    Copying Tasks Rules
    • Links between selected Tasks will always be copied across

    • Task history (the activity log & progress updates) will not be copied over

    • If you do not select a property to be copied, a default option will be applied to the property

    Task Panel


    You can open a Task from anywhere; Gantt, Map, Board, or List View. Just click the task to open the full Task Panel, right on top of your current view so you won’t lose your place. Reorder the panel sections to keep the most relevant info where you need it.

    To open a Task from the Gantt:

    • Right-click any Task and select View Details

    • The Task Panel will open

    To open a Task from Map

    • Click any Task Card from the section on the left hand-side

    • Or, click the Work Area on the Map and then the icon

    • The Task Panel will open

    To open a Task from Board

    • Click any Task Card on Board

    • The Task Panel will open

    To open a Task from List

    • Click the name of any Task in your List

    • The Task Panel will open

    Task Panel Preferences
    • The Task Panel is made up of sections that can be collapsed or reordered

    • Drag and drop sections to arrange them however you like

    • Your custom layout is saved to your user - it stays consistent across all Projects and Views, including Mobile

    Task Activity Log


    The Task Activity Log shows a full history of every change, from edits and delays to comments & documents, with who made the change and when.

    To open the Activity Log:

    • Right-click any Task and select View Details

    • The Task Panel will open

    • Click to toggle the Activity Log on or off

    To comment on a Task:

    • Right-click any Task and select View Details

    • The Task Panel will open

    • Start typing into the Add Comment box at the bottom of the panel

    To upload a Photo or Document to a Task:

    • Right-click any Task and select View Details

    • The Task Panel will open

    • Click the at the bottom of the panel

    • Select or to upload an image or document

    Published Plans API

    Overview

    This endpoint provides access to Published Plans for a project which can be a powerful way to establish a "cadence" based reporting routine (.e.g. comparing last week's performance against the prior week's) or the extraction and storage of historical plan data.

    By accessing the Published Plans, you can ensure that any measurement of the data is based on reviewed and agreed plans by the project team.

    The most common use cases of this endpoint are;

    • connection to Aphex-provided Power BI templates.

    • connection to Excel or Power BI to create custom-built reports across a project or series of projects.

    • consumption and storage via an ETL operation across one or many projects within a portfolio.

    The Power BI API has three components.

    • Query Parameters

    • Data Model

    Setting Up Power BI

    If you are looking for the quick guide to setting up Power BI for your project,

    Authentication

    You can access the API by querying the endpoint URL for your desired project and providing a valid Token.

    Finding your API URL

    As a Project Administrator, head to your project in the Aphex Planner app. From the Integrations page the API can be enabled.

    This will uncover the API URL specific to that project. The URL structure will be;

    Generating Tokens

    From the same location you sourced the API URL, a new Token created. Create a new Token and name it i.e. Project Dashboard Token 1

    Secret Token

    You cannot retrieve the token later so you should save it in a secret manager. If you lose the token you can generate a new one.

    Querying the API

    To successfully authenticate your request to the API URL, set the Token in the Authorization header of the request.

    This can be done three ways;

    1. If you are using an Aphex Power BI Template, simply paste the URL and Token into the setup modal

    1. If you are generating your own report in Power BI, set up a new "Web" source. From within the Advanced menu enter the URL and header request key of Authorization with Bearer followed by your Token as the value.

    1. If you are consuming the data in any other service construct a valid cURL request (example below).

    Query Parameters

    Query parameters allow you to adjust what the response shall contain. To enable projects of varying size to get the most out of this API within the single response limit of 32Mb the following query parameters are supported;

    Parameter
    Description

    Note to enable responses greater than 32Mb please ask about an Enterprise plan.

    Data Model

    Valid requests to the API will return a JSON response consistent with the API data model.

    The Power BI API Data Model contains the following objects;

    Publications

    The Publications are included within the response window. The API will, by default, return up to the five most recent Publications.

    Response

    • Publication Name

    Publication Summaries

    The Owner breakdown for each Publication shows ready status and related data

    Response

    • Owner Name

    • Owner Email

    Tasks

    The unique Tasks included in the response

    Response

    • Task ID

    • Project Name

    Task Version

    The Versions of the Tasks included in each of the Publications along with all Task properties.

    Response

    • Task ID

    • Publication ID

    Status

    All Status events on each of the Tasks at each of the Publications

    Response

    • Task ID

    • Publication ID

    Labour Resources

    All Labour assigned on each of the Tasks at each of the Publications

    Response

    • Task ID

    • Date

    Plant Resources

    All Plant assigned on each of the Tasks at each of the Publications

    Response

    • Task ID

    • Date

    Material Resources

    All Materials assigned on each of the Tasks at each of the Publications

    Response

    • Task ID

    • Date

    Blockers

    All Blockers assigned on each of the Tasks at each of the Publications

    Response

    • Task ID

    • Blocker Due Date

    Limits and Restrictions

    The Power BI API has a small number of restrictions and limits to ensure the availability of the system and the security of customer data.

    • Token Management Restrictions: As covered in section, requests to the API will only succeed if they follow the correct request structure and include both a valid URL and Token. Tokens are generated individually for a Project, by a user with Project Admin rights.

    • Token Validity Limits: Generated tokens have a maximum lifespan of 3 months to ensure that over time, project data is secure by default. On expiry, or at any time, new tokens can be generated for the project.

    • Limits: To stay within infrastructure limits and avoid paged responses on this end point, a response limit of 32Mb exists. If you experience a server error, please try reducing you data request by passing in query parameters. There is also a hard data history limit of 6 months.

    Note to enable responses greater than 32Mb please ask about an Enterprise plan.

    Connect ArcGIS Layers

    Things to know before you get started:

    • This feature is available on Pro+ or Enterprise plans

    • You need to be a Project Admin to set up the integration

    • Aphex supports layers being connected from any ArcGIS service (Online or Enterprise)

    If your team uses ArcGIS to manage design context, utilities, exclusion zones, or aerial imagery, you can bring that same data into Aphex. The ArcGIS integration allows you to overlay live GIS layers directly onto your Map, so that short-term planning happens with real site context in view.

    This guide walks you through how to connect your ArcGIS account, find the correct URL for your layer, add it to your project in Aphex, and manage the integration moving forward.

    Supported ArcGIS Layer Types


    Aphex supports a range of commonly used ArcGIS layer types. Here’s what you can connect and display in your project. We’ll keep this list updated as more are added:

    Feature Layers

    Map Image Layers

    Tile Layers (Raster and Vector)

    Maximise Layer Loading Performance

    Layer Type: Tiled or raster image layer types generally load faster than feature layers. This is especially true for layers with many strings (lines), such as design alignments. Where possible, seek to publish layers with these types;

    Layer Type
    Best Use

    Retrieving the Layer URL


    To connect a layer to Aphex, you’ll need the page URL from the ArcGIS Item Details page. This makes sure the layer metadata and access permissions load correctly.

    To find the Layer URL:

    • Login to your ArcGIS instance

    • Navigate to the layer you want to connect to your Aphex Project

    • Make sure the layer is one of the supported layer types

    • Click into the layer to open the Item Details Page

    The ArcGIS Item Details URL will commonly appear in a format similar to the below;

    Connect your ArcGIS account to Aphex


    You can connect your ArcGIS account to Aphex using either your ArcGIS login credentials or a . Once linked, you’ll be able to access and validate layers tied to your connected ArcGIS account.

    To add your ArcGIS credentials into Aphex:

    • Open your Aphex Project

    • Click your Project Title in the top left then select Integrations

    • Scroll to the Mapping Connection section

    • Click and select from:

    Registered User vs Registered App

    You can connect private ArcGIS layers to Aphex using either a registered user account or a registered app (OAuth2.0). Both options work, but the app connection is more flexible if you're managing access across multiple projects.

    Using a registered app allows you to control exactly which layers projects can access, without relying on a single user having access to everything. This is especially useful if your Organisation needs to manage permissions per project or restrict access to sensitive layers.

    With a registered user, that user account must have access to every layer being connected - which can get messy across teams or projects. Apps make it easier to scale securely.

    Add Layers to the Map


    Once you’ve got your Layer URL handy, you can plug it into any real-world Location in your Project. After connecting it, set a Layer Policy to control exactly which sublayers show up in Aphex, keeping things neat and relevant for your team.

    Aphex will then automatically pull through any updates from ArcGIS, so your map stays fresh without you needing to re-upload or re-import a thing.

    Both private and public layer sources from can be used as a canvas for mapping in Aphex. Each Aphex Location will accept up to 20 different layer connections.

    Visit our doc for step by step instructions on how to add layers to the Map and define a layer policy.

    Common Connection Errors


    Aphex supports layers being connected from any ArcGIS service (Online or Enterprise); however, there are some common things to validate if you experience issues;

    Credentials do not have Layer Access

    Check that the ArcGIS user or app you’re using has permission to view the layer. Try logging into ArcGIS directly and opening the layer using the same credentials - if it works there, it should work in Aphex.

    If you are using a Registered User account for access, you can test the access level of that account by simply logging into your ESRI/ArcGIS account and attempting to open the layer you want to integrate. If you can open a layer in ArcGIS, your account has permission to view it.

    Example Errors

    "Failed to connect to your ArcGIS Instance

    Please check your login credentials and try again or speak to your ArcGIS admin"

    Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) Restrictions

    By default, ArcGIS allows CORS - meaning external services like Aphex can, with the appropriate credentials, view resources such as layers. However, some GIS administrators may disallow this feature as an added security feature.

    If you find that a layer connects successfully, but no data is visible on the map, it may be a result of the ArcGIS CORS policy at your company.

    ArcGIS supports CORS access enabled, disabled, or disabled with exceptions. Therefore you can either ask your GIS administrator to return the CORS policy to default enabled or to add the following domains as CORS exceptions;

    • https://app.aphex.co

    • https://dev.aphex.co

    For guides on adjusting the ArcGIS CORS policy, please refer to the ArcGIS Help Guide .

    Example Errors

    Error inside the Add Layer window:

    "Url Error - Please check the url is correct and that the server is configured to allow requests from app.aphex.co"

    Error inside the Browser Developer Console:

    Access to '<layer url>' from origin 'https://app.aphex.co' has been blocked by CORS policy: No 'Access-Control-Allow-Origin' header is present on the requested resource.

    Unsupported Layer Type or Invalid URL

    Make sure you're using the Item Details page URL (not the direct tile or REST endpoint). Only supported layer types (listed above) will load.

    Example Errors

    "Url Error - Please check the url is correct and that the server is configured to allow requests from app.aphex.co"

    Layer Performance Tips


    Aphex is designed to be as fast and lightweight as possible for users who could be accessing their project on poor connections or underpowered devices.

    ArcGIS, however, is a powerful GIS service that allows its customers to create immense geographical datasets.

    Connecting an ArcGIS layer to Aphex will allow that layer to be loaded to an almost identical way to the way that layer is loaded from ESRI services.

    To keep load times as short as possible, each sublayer within a layer can be set to Hide or Show, depending on the context needed at the time.

    There is currently a limit of 42 sublayers per layer - any sublayers that attempt to load past this amount will not render.

    Therefore, teams creating layers for use in Aphex should seek to balance information and end-user performance. The more data that is included in a layer, the longer it will take to load for everyone.

    In general, Aphex should take as long to load a layer as it takes ArcGIS to load the same layer. You can test the expected load time for your users by opening a layer natively in ArcGIS first.

    Reduce Server Requests (Low Data Mode)


    For ArcGIS Map Service Layers (Raster Tile Layers & Map Image Layers) you have the ability to change the request mode, once the Layer has been connected to your Aphex Location, to reduce server requests.

    To switch to Low Data Mode:

    • Open your Aphex Project

    • Click your Project Title in the top left then select Locations

    • Locate your Layer and click ...

    • Select View Summary

    This mode is set on a layer-by-layer basis.

    Organisation Users

    Each user has an Organisation Role that controls what Organisation information they can access and manage in the Admin Console.

    Organisation User Roles at a Glance:

    Role
    Permissions Include
    In your master schedule, create a User Defined Field (you might want to name this something straightforward: Aphex Filter)
  • In this UDF assign a consistent value against the activities you would like to import and ones you would not (this could simply be "Yes" and "No")

  • Project Assets (Optional)

    Save time during your import by including Owners and Project Assets in your import file.

    You can add the email address of the user’s you’d like to assign imported work to automatically, and the subcontractor and location of each task.

    • Create a UDF for each attribute (i.e. Subcontractor, Location and Owner) you wish to pre-populate.

    • Name each UDF something memorable, like “Aphex Subcontractor”.

    • In each UDF (eg. Subcontractor or Location), insert the field (Subcontractor, location etc.) for each activity. This should be consistent with the name in your Aphex project (if not, Aphex will create a new one)

    • In the Owner UDF, insert the email address of the activity’s owner. Check that this matches the email address the team member uses for Aphex. If not, the address entered will receive an invite to join the project.

    You can also skip this step by leaving both dropdowns blank and clicking
    Aphex will only import Tasks that don’t already exist in the project - we identify matches by Activity ID (mapped to Aphex External ID)
  • If a Task has already been imported before (based on its Activity ID), it will be skipped - even if it’s since been updated in the source tool.

  • Imported Tasks are treated as the source of truth from the time they’re brought into Aphex - they won’t be overridden or replaced by future imports.

  • Import as Tasks. If imported, WBS summaries will convert to Task Dependant types.

    For Level of Effort (LoE) Tasks you can select from:

    • Ignore all LoE tasks and these will not be imported (this is the recommended option)

    • Import LoE tasks as task dependant types without links

    • Import LoE tasks as task dependant types with links - Selecting this option may cause variance in your import

    Once you've made your selection, select to move to the next step

    Check Driving Predecessors

    There may be some Tasks that are being driven by Tasks outside of your import dates. This can sometimes result in variance. The decisions for this step include:

    For Driving Predecessor Tasks, you can choose to:

    • Add missing Tasks to the import scope (this is the recommended option)

    • Remove non-driving Links between selected Tasks.

    • Do nothing

    For Driving Predecessors Level of Effort Tasks you can select from:

    • Remove non-driving Links between selected Tasks (this is the recommended option)

    • Add missing Tasks to the import scope

    • Do nothing

    Once you've made your selection, select to move to the next step

    Handle Actual Dates

    Aphex uses Task Status to define a Task state & scheduling behaviour. Decide how you would like to handle tasks with Actual Dates.

    For Actual Starts, you can choose to:

    • Import without Predecessor Links (this is the recommended option)

    • Import with Predecessor Links

    For Actual Finishes you can select from:

    • Set Task Status to Done (this is the recommended option)

    • Do nothing

    Once you've made your selection, select to move to the next step

    Aphex doesn’t support zero-duration tasks; so Milestones are converted to one-day activities.
  • If a one-day duration is applied, Aphex will automatically add a -1 day lag to any successor links to prevent introducing variance.

  • If an Asset (like a Subcontractor or Owner) already exists with an exact name match, the imported tasks will be assigned to it. Otherwise, a new Asset will be created.

  • The Owner field must contain email addresses. If the email matches an existing user in the project, the task will be assigned to them. If not, they’ll be invited as a new user.

  • If a calendar with the same name already exists in the Aphex project, imported Tasks will be assigned to the existing calendar instead.

  • Relationship links between Tasks in your import scope are created automatically.

    • If both linked Tasks are imported at the same time, the relationship is created during import.

    • If the successor is imported later, Aphex will automatically stitch the existing predecessor and the newly imported successor back together once both Tasks exist.

  • Shifts are assigned to every Tasks.

    • Day Shift is assigned by default.

    • Depending on task timing, Aphex may assign All Shift or Night Shift automatically.

  • External IDs are generated automatically:

    • If Primavera P6 is the source, the Activity ID becomes the External ID.

    • If Microsoft Project is the source, the External ID is built from the Project Name + ID.

  • Task Type

  • Modification Reason (for Modified):

    • Why the task was changed (e.g., "Task type changed", "Links removed", "Status changed to Done", "Target Date set")

  • Skipped Reason (for Skipped):

    • Why the task was skipped (e.g., "LoE Tasks Skipped", "WBS Summary Skipped")

  • Folders Skipped CSV:

    • There is also a report for skipped folders, with folder-level details, e.g., folder code, name, and reason for skipping⁠

    Here's how to allocate activities to the users responsible:
    • Click your Project Title

    • Click Master Schedule Imports, then navigate to the Project Data page using the side-menu

    • Open the Unassigned tab

    • Select an owner for each task with the drop-down menu

    • Click

    2

    Add Tasks to the Plan

    If you're a user who has been assigned new tasks from an import, they'll appear in your Backlog. All you need to do is pull them onto the Gantt.

    To add your Tasks to the Plan:

    • Click your Project Title

    • Click Master Schedule Imports, then navigate to the Project Data page using the side-menu

    • Click

    The Project Default Calendar is automatically applied
  • Each task starts with a 1-day duration

  • Each new task will be placed on the nearest Monday within your current View

  • (You can adjust these at any time)

    Subtask
  • Milestone

  • Select the new value from the list

  • Click the to confirm. Your update will be applied to all selected Tasks

  • Tasks you don’t have permission to edit will be skipped, and you’ll be notified

    • After each action, you’ll get a summary of how many tasks were updated or skipped with the option to undo

    Click the to confirm

  • Your Task is now a Parent Task with embedded Subtasks

  • To add more Subtasks later, click directly under the Parent Task

  • Package

  • Folder

  • If one of these Properties are edited, this update will automatically apply to the Parent and all its Subtasks.

    All other Task Properties can be individually allocated to Subtasks.

    The Subtask will move under the selected Parent

    Progress Updates
  • Comments

  • Documents

  • Milestone History

  • Material Actuals

  • All Relationship Links between the duplicated Tasks will be duplicated

  • Click Delete Tasks to delete all selected Tasks

  • Pick an existing Project or create a new one

  • Select whether to copy all Task Properties or pick from a custom list

  • Review the 'Copy Task Summary' and Click

  • Open the destination project: your tasks will be waiting on the Gantt

  • Copied Assets will match to existing Assets (if the Name or Code matches), otherwise new Assets will be created in the destination Project

  • Tasks can only be moved into Projects within the same Organisation

  • The layout will apply every time you open a task, until you change it again

  • There are different task panel layouts for Tasks, Parent Tasks, and Packages

  • Uploaded files will appear in the Task Activity Log

  • Use filters to show only

  • Task Properties
    Gantt Columns
    Subfolders
    Publication ID
  • Publication Date

  • Ready Status

  • Ready Date

  • Missing Field

  • Clashes

  • Overdue Blockers

  • Project ID

  • Task Name

  • Start

  • End

  • Duration

  • Calendar

  • Shift

  • Owner Name

  • Owner Email

  • Subcontractor

  • Work Area ID

  • Location Name

  • Location Type

  • Folder Path

  • Folder Name

  • External ID

  • Package ID

  • Package Name

  • Parent ID

  • Milestone *

  • Status

  • Notes

  • Blockers

  • AssigneeEmails

  • AssigneeNames

  • Tags

  • TargetDate

  • *Milestones will appear as Key Task [true / false] in the response

    Date

  • Amount

  • Status Type

  • Reason

  • Created At

  • Creator Name

  • Creator Email

  • Publication ID

  • Resource ID

  • Resource Name

  • Resource Planned Quantity

  • Publication ID

  • Resource ID

  • Resource Name

  • Resource Category

  • Resource Planned Quantity

  • Publication ID

  • Resource ID

  • Resource Name

  • Resource Planned Quantity

  • Resource Actual Quantity

  • Resource Unit

  • Publication ID

  • Blocker ID

  • Blocker Name

  • Blocker Category

  • Blocker Status

  • Fair Use Policy: The API endpoint is designed to support periodic (usually weekly) requests from projects. Use of the service outside that threatens the availability of the service for other projects could result in a suspension of the service for the offending project.

    Limit

    limit=number

    This parameter will determine how many of the historical published versions are returned. If not provided, the response will default to 5

    Status

    status=boolean

    This parameter will determine whether status events are included in the response. If not provided, the response will default to true

    Resource

    resource=boolean

    This parameter will determine whether labour, plant and material assignments are included in the response. If not provided, the response will default to true

    Blockers blockers=boolean

    This parameter will determine whether blockers are included in the response. If not provided, the response will default to true

    Authentication
    check out this guide here
    Authentication
    Server Selection: If your company can publish layers to an Enterprise or ArcGIS online server, there is usually a performance difference across those. Whichever is faster for loading layers in the ESRI service will be faster in Aphex.

    Copy the URL from your browser’s address bar - this is the URL you’ll use in Aphex

    • Registered User

    • Registered App (Client ID and Client Secret - OAuth2)

  • Select

  • and scroll to the Minimise Server Requests section. Make a choice between:
    • Optimised (default)

    • Reduce Server Requests

  • Click

  • Map Image Layers

    Designs, utilities, alignments. Anything that is suited to a feature layer will perform well in Aphex as a Map Image.

    Tile Users

    Drone or other aerial imagery are often already stored as tile layers and perform well. If your company's ESRI account doesn't support this, Map Image will work, too.

    registered app
    ESRI ArcGIS
    Add Map Layers
    here

    Same as Super Admin, except they can’t delete the Organisation or manage billing.

    Billing Admin

    Access to billing and subscription management only.

    Member

    Access assigned at the project level only - no admin or billing permissions.

    Super Admin Permissions

    Super Admins have the highest level of control in the Organisation. This role is designed for ultimate Organisation-level oversight and responsibility.

    Super Admin Permissions:

    Full access and management of Organisation Settings

    Full access and management of Organisation Users

    Full access and management of the Projects page

    Full access and management of the Security controls

    Ability to permanently delete the Organisation (Obliterate)

    System Admin Permissions

    System Admins have broad access across the Organisation, similar to Super Admins. They can manage Users, Projects, Security settings, and Advanced Permissions - but cannot delete the Organisation, or manage Billing.

    System Admin Permissions:

    Management of Organisation Settings

    Full access and management of Organisation Users

    Full access and management of the Projects page

    Full access and management of the Security controls

    Billing Admin Permissions

    Billing Admins can view and manage the Organisation’s Subscription and payment settings. They don’t have access to Project or User management.

    Billing Admin Permissions

    Full access and management of Billing & Subscription

    Organisation Member Permissions

    By default, every new User invited to the Organisation or to a Project is added as an Org Member. Members have core access to the Organisation and can participate in Projects they're added to. They cannot open or access any pages in the Admin Console.

    Permissions Matrix
    Permission
    Super
    Sys
    Billing
    Member
    Notes

    Access the Org

    Seat Entitlements


    Alongside their Organisation Role, Users can also be granted a Planner Seat. Seats are paid and will determine if the user has the possibility of accessing Planner in each Project they are invited to:

    Paid Seat
    Entitlement

    Planner

    • Can be given Full Planner Access in any Project they are a User on

    • Is able to open Aphex Insight

    Full Planner access is determined at the Project level, but Users must first be assigned the correct seat to be eligible.

    Adding or Revoking Seats


    You can assign or revoke Planner Seats individually, in bulk, or during the user invite flow.

    Adding Planner Seats:

    Open the Admin App and select Organisation Users

    • Indiviual Assignment:

      • Click on a specific User to open their slide-in panel

      • Toggle on their Planner Seat​

    • Bulk Assignment:

      • Select multiple Users using the checkboxes

      • Use the multi-select toolbar to provision Planner Seats for all selected Users⁠⁠​

    • Adding New Users:

      • When using the <+ add user> flow, you can assign Planner Seats during the invitation process by toggling their Planner Seat​ on

    How Planner Seats Work
    • Turning a Planner Seat on gives the User the ability to access Planner in any Project they’re part of, and they’ll be included in billing.

    • If a Planner Seat is removed, any Projects where the user had Full Planner Access will automatically downgrade them to Limited access.

    • Users with Planner Seats count toward your billed seat total - this directly affects your Organisation’s subscription cost.

    • Only Super Admins and System Admins can manage Planner Seat assignments at the organisation level.

    Adding Organisation Users


    To add a new User into your Organisation:

    • Open the Admin App and select Organisation Users

    • Click "Add User" to trigger the Organisation Add User window

    • Enter email addresses separated by commas⁠

    • The system will validate email formats and check for existing users⁠

    • Toggle the Planner Seat option as needed⁠

    • Click

    What is the experience for Invited Users?
    • Users receive email invitations automatically when added⁠

    • These email invitations will have a shortcut to create an account

    • Once an account is created, the User will be able to access your Organisation

    • The invite link is optional - invited Users can also sign up directly using their invited email address at

    Default Settings for New Organisation Users

    When users are successfully added, they receive:⁠⁠​

    • Organisation Role: Member (default)

    • Planner Seat: No planner seat (unless assigned)

    • Authentication: Matches organisation setup

    • Last Login: Shows as "never" until first login

    Adding a User at the Organisation level gives them access to the Organisation, but they won’t see any plans until they’ve been added to a Project

    Suspending Organisation Users


    Suspending a User blocks their access to the Organisation and all associated Projects without deleting their data. Suspended Users no longer count toward your billed seat total.

    To suspend a User:

    Open the Admin App and select Organisation Users

    • Indiviual Suspension:

      • Click on a specific User to open their slide-in panel

      • Click ... then Suspend User​

      • Confirm

    • Bulk Suspension:

      • Select multiple Users using checkboxes

      • Use the multi-select toolbar to choose ... then Suspend​

    What Happens When Users Are Suspended

    Access Blocked

    • Users are blocked from accessing all organisation projects and apps⁠

    Cannot Be Added

    • Other users cannot add Suspended Users to projects⁠

    Status Indication

    • Suspended users show as Suspended throughout the system⁠

    Billing Impact

    • Suspended users are no longer billed⁠

    Records Preserved

    • User data and activity history remain intact⁠

    Key Rules and Restrictions

    Super Admin Protection

    • If suspending a Super Admin, there must be at least one other active Super Admin⁠

    Project Dependencies

    • User must not be on any active or archived Projects⁠ -they must be removed as Project Users first

    Restoring a Suspended User

    Automatic Reactivation: Restores access to the Organisation, Projects and billing status⁠

    Deleting Organisation Users


    Deleting an Organisation User removes all record of that User from your Organisation. Users must be suspended before they can be deleted⁠.

    To Delete Organisation Users:

    Open the Admin App and select Organisation Users

    • Indiviual Delete:

      • Click on an already suspended User to open their slide-in panel

      • Click ... then Delete User​

      • Confirm

    • Bulk Delete:

      • Select multiple suspended Users using checkboxes

      • Use the multi-select toolbar to choose ... then Delete User​

    What Happens When Users Are Deleted from the Org

    Permanent Removal:

    • Deleting a User fully removes them from the Organisation. They can’t be restored but they can be re-invited if needed, and will need to be re-added to any Projects.

    Data Impact:

    • User's activity history and records are permanently deleted

    Exporting Organisation Users


    Exporting Organisation Users allows you to download a CSV file containing user data from the Organisation Users table.

    To Export Organisation Users:

    • Open the Admin App and select Organisation Users

    • Select at the top right of the table

    Org Users Export Format
    Column
    Description

    Name

    User's chosen display name

    Email

    User's email address

    Role

    Suspension Status: Shows "Suspended" for suspended users⁠

    Super Admin

    Everything. Full control over the Organisation, Project management, Users, Settings, Billing - even deletion.

    System Admin

    Data Processing Addendum

    1. General

    This Data Processing Addendum (DPA) supplements and is incorporated into our Aphex Platform Terms of Service (Terms) agreed between Aphex Software Limited, a company registered in England and Wales with company number 09681747 (we, us or our), and the Customer (you or your). This DPA applies to our provision of Services to you under the Terms. This DPA applies from the date you agree to our Terms, and will continue in accordance with the terms of this DPA.

    2. Definitions

    2.1 Capitalised terms in this DPA have the meaning given in the Terms, the Annexures, and as set out below:

    Customer means the contracting entity purchasing services from us, as set out in the Terms.

    EU GDPR means Regulation 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council on the protection of natural persons with regard to the Processing of Personal Data and on the free movement of such data (General Data Protection Regulation).

    Platform means the Aphex platform.

    Transferred Data means any Personal Data Processed by us or our Personnel on behalf of you in connection with the Terms.

    Restricted Transfer means a transfer of personal data from the United Kingdom to any other country which is not subject to adequacy regulations pursuant to Section 17A of the United Kingdom Data Protection Act 2018.

    Services means the services we agree to provide to you pursuant to the Terms.

    UK GDPR means the EU GDPR as incorporated into United Kingdom law by virtue of Section 3 of the United Kingdom’s European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018.

    UK Addendum means the international data transfer addendum to the European Commission’s standard contractual clauses for international data transfers approved by the Information Commissioner’s Office under section 119A of the Data Protection Act 2018 on 21 March 2022 (version B.1.0), and as updated from time to time.

    2.2 The terms, “Commission”, “Controller”, “Data Subject”, “Member State”, “Personal Data”, “Personal Data Breach”, “Processor”, “Processing” and “Sub-Processor” shall have the same meaning as in the UK GDPR.

    3. Roles of the Parties

    The Parties acknowledge and agree that in connection with the Terms, where you provide us with Transferred Data, you will be the Controller, and we will process the Transferred Data on your instructions as a Processor.

    4. Processing of Personal Data

    4.1 Each Party agrees to comply with Applicable Data Protection Law in the Processing of Transferred Data.

    4.2 You instruct us to process Transferred Data in accordance with this DPA (including in accordance with Annex 1).

    4.3 We agree to not process Transferred Data other than on your documented instructions.

    5. Our Personnel

    We agree to take reasonable steps to ensure the reliability of any of our Personnel who may have access to the Transferred Data, ensuring in each case that:

    (a) access is strictly limited to those individuals who need to know / access the relevant Transferred Data, as strictly necessary for the purposes of the Terms; and

    (b) the relevant Personnel are subject to confidentiality undertakings or professional or statutory obligations of confidentiality.

    6. Security

    6.1 Taking into account the state of the art, the costs of implementation and the nature, scope, context and purposes of Processing as well as the risk of varying likelihood and severity for the rights and freedoms of natural persons, we agree to implement appropriate technical and organisational measures in relation to the Transferred Data to ensure a level of security appropriate to that risk in accordance with Applicable Data Protection Law, and as further particularised in Annex 2.

    6.2 In assessing the appropriate level of security, we agree to take into account the risks that are presented by Processing, in particular from a Personal Data Breach.

    7. Sub-Processing

    7.1 Where we wish to engage a new Sub-Processor, we agree to provide written notice to you of the details of the engagement of the Sub-Processor at least 14 days’ prior to engaging the new Sub-Processor (including details of the processing it will perform). You may object in writing to our appointment of a new Sub-Processor within 7 days of such notice, provided that such objection is based on reasonable grounds relating to data protection. In such event, the Parties will discuss such concerns in good faith with a view to achieving resolution. If the Parties are not able to achieve resolution, we may, at our election:

    (a) not appoint the proposed Sub-Processor;

    (b) not disclose any Transferred Data we process on your behalf to the proposed Sub-Processor; or

    (c) inform you that we may terminate the Terms (including this DPA) for convenience, in which case, clause 14.2 will apply.

    7.2 You agree that the remedies described above in clauses 7.2(a)-(c) are the only remedies available to you if you object to our engagement of any proposed Sub-Processor by us.

    7.3 Where we engage a Sub-Processor to process Transferred Data, we agree to enter into a written agreement with the Sub-Processor containing data protection obligations no less protective that those in this DPA with respect to the Transferred Data, and to remain responsible to you for the performance of such Sub-Processor’s data protection obligations under such terms.

    7.4 Where the the transfer of Transferred Data from us to a Sub-Processor is a Restricted Transfer, it will be subject to the UK Addendum (and documents or legislation referred to within it), which shall be deemed to be incorporated into this DPA, and the UK Addendum is considered an appropriate safeguard.

    8. Data Subject Rights

    8.1 Taking into account the nature of the Processing, we agree to assist you by implementing appropriate technical and organisational measures, insofar as this is possible, for the fulfilment of your obligations, as reasonably understood by you, to respond to requests to exercise Data Subject rights under the Applicable Data Protection Law.

    8.2 We agree to:

    (a) promptly notify you if we receive a request from a Data Subject under any Applicable Data Protection Law in respect of Transferred Data; and

    (b) ensure that we do not respond to that request except on your documented instructions or as required by Applicable Data Protection Law to which we are subject, in which case we shall, to the extent permitted by Applicable Data Protection Law, inform you of that legal requirement before we (or our Sub-Processor) respond to the request.

    9. Personal Data Breach

    9.1 We agree to notify you without undue delay upon becoming aware of a Personal Data Breach affecting Transferred Data, and to provide you with sufficient information to allow you to meet any obligations to report or inform Data Subjects of the Personal Data Breach under the Data Protection Laws.

    9.2 We agree to co-operate with you and take reasonable commercial steps as directed by you to assist in the investigation, mitigation and remediation of each such Personal Data Breach.

    9.3 If you decide to notify a Supervisory Authority, Data Subjects or the public of a Personal Data Breach, you agree to provide us with advance copies of the proposed notices and, subject to Applicable Data Protection Law (including any mandated deadlines under the UK GDPR), allow us an opportunity to provide any clarifications or corrections to those notices.

    10. Data Protection Impact Assessment and Prior Consultation

    We agree to provide reasonable assistance to you, at your cost (to be charged on a reasonable time and materials basis), with any data protection impact assessments, and prior consultations with Supervisory Authorities or other competent data privacy authorities, which you reasonably consider to be required by article 35 or 36 of the UK GDPR or equivalent provisions of any other Data Protection Law (to the extent you do not otherwise have access to the relevant information and such information is in our control).

    11. Deletion or return of Personal Data

    Subject to this clause 11, and subject to any document retention requirements at law, we agree to promptly and in any event within 30 business days of any valid requests involving the Processing of Transferred Data (Cessation Date), delete and procure the deletion of all copies of those Transferred Data.

    12. Audit Rights

    12.1 Subject to this clause 12, where required by law, we shall make available to you on request all information reasonably necessary to demonstrate compliance with this DPA, and shall allow for and contribute to audits, including inspections, by you or an auditor mandated by you in relation to the Processing of Transferred Personal Data by us.

    12.2 Where clause 12.1 applies, any audit (or inspection):

    (a) must be conducted during our regular business hours, with reasonable advance notice (which shall not be less than 30 business days);

    (b) will be subject to our reasonable confidentiality procedures;

    (c) must be limited in scope to matters specific to you and agreed in advance with us;

    (d) must not require us to disclose to you any information that could cause us to breach any of our obligations under Applicable Data Protection Law;

    (e) to the extent we need to expend time to assist you with the audit (or inspection), this will be funded by you, in accordance with pre-agreed rates; and

    (f) may only be requested by you a maximum of one time per year, except where required by a competent Supervisory Authority or where there has been a Personal Data Breach in relation to Transferred Personal Data, caused by us.

    12.3 Your information and audit rights only arise under clause 12.1 to the extent that the Terms does not otherwise give you information and audit rights that meet the relevant requirements of Applicable Data Protection Law.

    13. Liability

    Despite anything to the contrary in the Terms or this DPA, to the maximum extent permitted by law, the Liability of each Party and its affiliates under this DPA is subject to the exclusions and limitations of Liability set out in the Terms.

    14. Termination

    14.1 Each Party agrees that a failure or inability to comply with the terms of this DPA and/or the Applicable Data Protection Law constitutes a material breach of the Terms. In such event, you may, without penalty:

    (a) require us to suspend the processing of Transferred Data until such compliance is restored; or

    (b) terminate the Terms effective immediately on written notice to us.

    14.2 In the case of such suspension or termination by you, we shall provide a prompt pro-rata refund of all sums paid in advance under the Terms which relate to the period of suspension or the period after the date of termination (as applicable).

    14.3 Notwithstanding the expiry or termination of this DPA, this DPA will remain in effect until, and will terminate automatically upon, deletion by us of all Transferred Data covered by this DPA, in accordance with this DPA.

    14.4 You authorise our engagement of the Sub-Processors already engaged by us at the date of this DPA, which are set out at . .


    ANNEX 1

    DESCRIPTION OF TRANSFERS


    ANNEX 2

    TECHNICAL AND ORGANISATIONAL MEASURES INCLUDING TECHNICAL AND ORGANISATIONAL MEASURES TO ENSURE THE SECURITY OF THE DATA

    In assessing the appropriate level of security, we agree to take into account the risks that are presented by Processing, in particular from a Personal Data Breach. We have implemented and will maintain the following technical and organisational measures to protect Transferred Data:

    Technical Security Measures

    6.2.1 Encryption and Data Protection

    • Data at Rest: All Transferred Data is encrypted at rest using industry-standard AES-256 encryption

    • Data in Transit: All data transmissions are protected using TLS 1.2 or higher encryption protocols

    • Key Management: Cryptographic keys are managed through secure key management systems with automated rotation, role-based access controls, and comprehensive audit logging

    • Database Security: Production databases are encrypted and access is restricted to authorised personnel only through secure authentication mechanisms

    6.2.2 Access Controls and Authentication

    • Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA): Required for all employee access to systems containing or processing Transferred Data

    • Role-Based Access Control (RBAC): Access to Transferred Data is granted based on the principle of least privilege and business need-to-know basis

    • Regular Access Reviews: Systematic review and audit of user access rights conducted quarterly to ensure continued appropriateness

    • Single Sign-On (SSO): Centralised authentication system with secure identity management

    6.2.3 Network Security

    • Web Application Firewall (WAF): All public-facing endpoints are protected by managed WAF solutions to prevent common web application attacks

    • Network Segmentation: Production environments are logically separated from development and testing environments

    • Intrusion Detection and Prevention Systems (IDS/IPS): Network-based and host-based monitoring systems for detecting and preventing unauthorised access attempts

    • DDoS Protection: Distributed denial-of-service protection mechanisms implemented at network level

    6.2.4 System Security and Monitoring

    • Security Information and Event Management (SIEM): Comprehensive logging and real-time monitoring of security events across all systems processing Transferred Data

    • Vulnerability Management: Regular vulnerability scanning and penetration testing, with documented remediation processes

    • Endpoint Protection: Advanced threat detection and response solutions deployed on all endpoints

    • Backup and Recovery: Automated daily backups of all Transferred Data with encryption matching production data standards

    6.2.5 Application Security

    • Secure Development Lifecycle (SDLC): Security considerations integrated throughout the software development process

    • Code Analysis: Static and dynamic code analysis tools used to identify security vulnerabilities

    • Threat Modelling: Security threat assessments conducted for new features and system changes

    • Third-Party Security Assessment: Regular penetration testing and security assessments by qualified external security firms

    Organisational Security Measures

    6.2.6 Information Security Management

    • ISO 27001 Certification: Our information security management system is certified to ISO 27001:2022 standards

    • Security Governance: Dedicated information security team with defined roles, responsibilities, and escalation procedures

    • Risk Management: Regular security risk assessments and documented risk treatment plans

    • Incident Response Plan: Comprehensive incident response procedures with defined roles, communication protocols, and recovery processes

    6.2.7 Personnel Security

    • Background Checks: Security screening of personnel with access to Transferred Data in accordance with applicable laws

    • Confidentiality Agreements: All personnel with potential access to Transferred Data are bound by confidentiality obligations

    • Security Training: Mandatory security awareness training for all employees, conducted annually with additional role-specific training for technical staff

    • Access Provisioning and De-provisioning: Formal processes for granting and revoking system access, including immediate access revocation upon employment termination

    6.2.8 Vendor and Sub-processor Management

    • Due Diligence: Security assessments of all sub-processors and vendors with access to Transferred Data

    • Contractual Requirements: All sub-processors subject to data protection obligations equivalent to those in this DPA

    • Regular Audits: Periodic assessment of sub-processor security controls and compliance

    • Supply Chain Security: Monitoring and assessment of third-party security practices and incident notifications

    6.2.9 Physical and Environmental Security

    • Data Centre Security: Physical security controls managed by certified cloud infrastructure providers (with SOC 2 Type II and ISO 27001 certifications)

    • Office Security: Access controls, visitor management, and clean desk policies at corporate facilities

    • Equipment Security: Secure disposal and sanitisation of hardware containing Transferred Data

    • Environmental Controls: Appropriate environmental monitoring and controls for systems processing Transferred Data

    6.2.10 Compliance and Audit

    • Regular Audits: Internal security audits conducted at least annually, with external compliance audits for relevant certifications

    • Documentation: Comprehensive documentation of all security controls and procedures

    • Policy Management: Regular review and update of security policies and procedures to reflect current threats and best practices

    • Compliance Monitoring: Ongoing monitoring and assessment of compliance with applicable data protection regulations and industry standards

    Review and Improvement

    We commit to:

    • Regularly reviewing and updating these measures to address evolving security threats and technological developments

    • Conducting annual assessments of the effectiveness of implemented security controls

    • Implementing improvements based on audit findings, security assessments, and industry best practices

    • Notifying you of any material changes to our security measures that may affect the protection of Transferred Data

    These measures are designed to ensure an appropriate level of security taking into account the state of the art, implementation costs, and the nature, scope, context, and purposes of processing, as well as the risks of varying likelihood and severity for the rights and freedoms of natural persons.


    ANNEX 3

    LIST OF SUBPROCESSORS

    Available at

    Connect Aphex to Power BI

    Things to know before you get started:

    • You will need the Desktop Power BI application downloaded onto your device.

    • You must be a Project Admin to set up the integration.

    In addition to our built in reporting app, Aphex Insight we also provide an integration with Power BI so that teams can customise their reports and hunt for insight.

    In this guide we will go through the key steps to start analysing your data in Power BI. Where necessary we will include links to more advanced features throughout.

    Enable Integration


    The Power BI Integration is enabled at a project level so that every team has control over who can access their data. To start, head to your project in Aphex Planner and locate the Integrations page.

    To enable the data source:

    • Open your project

    • Click your project title in the top left and select Integrations from the menu

    • Locate the Power BI section and toggle Enable Source

    Generate a Token


    Once you've enabled the Power BI source, you’ll be able to copy your project's unique URL endpoint.

    To keep your data secure, the endpoint won’t return any data unless the request includes a valid token. The token is shown once only, so be sure to copy it before closing the window. If it expires or you forget to save it, you can generate a new one at any time.

    To generate a token:

    • On the Integrations page, click + Generate New Token

    • Give your token a name so that people know what it's being used for

    • Click Generate Token

    • Select Copy Token

    How Tokens Work

    Authentication Power BI connects using two parts: a project-specific URL and a bearer token. The token acts like a secure key - it proves that the request is allowed to access the data behind the URL.

    Expiry Tokens expire automatically after 90 days, or can be manually revoked at any time from the project’s Integration settings.

    Multiple tokens supported You can create as many tokens as you need - useful if you’re connecting different tools or templates.

    Naming tokens Each token must be given a name when created. This helps you track where it’s being used (e.g. “PPC Dashboard” or “Client Reporting Suite”).

    Usage tracking You’ll be able to see the timestamp of last use and the

    Download a Template


    Next up: pick a template. We’ve created a set of ready-to-use Power BI dashboards so you don’t have to build your own from scratch. Choose one that fits your reporting needs, then you’ll be ready to connect your project data.

    To download a template:

    • Visit

    • Pick a Template

    • Enter in your details & email

    • Open the email and click the download link

    or build your own using the

    Load Data into Power BI


    Next step: open your template Before the template can show anything, it needs to connect to your project. This is where you plug in the values you saved earlier and let Power BI load your project data into the report.

    To connect the template to your Aphex Project:

    • Open the PBIT file in Power BI Desktop

    • You’ll be prompted to enter three values:

      • Project API URL

      • Token

    With your data loaded, the dashboard is ready to use. If you’re familiar with Power BI, you can tweak visuals, add filters, or expand the reports to fit your project’s workflow.

    Common Errors
    • If you receive a warning about installing the latest version of Power BI Desktop you can most likely continue on without issue (although updating your software is usually a good idea!)

    • Ensure your token is valid, and that you've copied the Project API URL correctly

    Access Web Content Prompt When Power BI prompts you with the Access Web Content window, it’s asking how to authenticate your connection to the API.

    Got a great report template? Why not give back to the Aphex Community and share it with us

    Common Connection Issues


    Most connection issues come down to one of a few predictable causes. This section walks through the ones we see most often and how to fix them.

    Access Web Content: Use Anonymous Authentication

    When Power BI prompts you with the Access Web Content window, make sure Anonymous is selected. This is important because the API uses your token for authentication - selecting any other method (like Windows or Organizational Account) will block the connection.

    To use Anonymous Authentication:

    • In the Access Web Content window, select Anonymous

    • Make sure no other method is selected, and that no other information has been entered into the window (like Web API Key, or Organizational Account)

    • You may also need to ensure the Privacy Level is set to None or Public to avoid errors when refreshing

    To prompt the Access Web Content window:

    • Open the template

    • Click Transform Data

    • Select Data Source Settings

    • Click Edit Permissions

    Example Errors

    “The 'Authorization' header is only supported when connecting anonymously.” These headers can be used with all authentication types: Accept, Accept-Charset, Accept-Encoding, etc.

    • This means Power BI tried to connect using an authentication method that doesn’t support your bearer token (such as Windows or Organizational Account).

    Response Size Limit (32mb)

    By default, your request will return data from the 5 most recent Published Versions. If your project’s dataset is too large, the connection may fail to load. Unless you're on an Enterprise plan, the API response must be under 32MB. You can reduce the amount of data being returned by using query parameters to limit the response size.

    Read more about query parameters in our

    Example Error Messages

    “The response payload size exceeds the limit.”

    • A clear sign the API returned more than Power BI is allowed to process.

    “DataFormat.Error: We reached the end of the buffer.”

    Ways to reduce data size

    You can use the following parameters individually or in combination:

    • Limit the number of versions Append ?limit=3 or ?limit=2 to your API URL → Example: https://app.aphex.co/au/power-bi...?limit=3

    Replace Expired Credentials

    Bearer tokens used for the Power BI integration are valid for 90 days. After that, the connection will stop working until you generate a new token.

    If your token has expired, simply return to the project’s Integrations page, revoke the old token, and generate a new one. You’ll need to re-enter the new token into your report to restore the connection.

    To replace an expired Token:

    • Generate a new Token from inside your Aphex Project

    • Open your template in Power BI

    • Click Transform Data then Edit Parameters

    • Select Edit Token

    Example Errors

    “The remote server returned an error: (401) Unauthorized.”

    • This usually means the token is missing, expired, or no longer valid.

    Set up Automatic Refresh


    Once your report is connected, you can configure scheduled refresh in Power BI to keep your data up to date automatically.

    We suggest setting the refresh to run a few hours (or the day after) your team typically creates the weekly Published Version in Aphex. That way, your dashboard will always reflect the latest plan, without any manual updates.

    To set up Scheduled Refresh inside Power BI:

    • Publish your report to Power BI Service

      • In Power BI Desktop, go to File → Publish → My Workspace (or your team’s shared workspace).

    • Open dataset settings

    Folders

    Who can access this feature?

    Project Admins can run Master Schedule Imports.

    In Aphex, the project’s WBS is built using Folders. Folders and Subfolders are how teams organise and group Tasks across the plan - whether you're pulling in a detailed structure from P6 or Asta, or building a more streamlined setup to suit daily and weekly site planning.

    https://app.aphex.co/power-bi/v1/<your_api_account_id>
    curl \
     -X GET \
     -H "Authorization: Bearer $<your_token>" \
     https://app.aphex.co/power-bi/v1/<your_API_account_id_here>
    https://<your-source>.maps.arcgis.com/home/item.html?id=<id>

    Session Management: Automatic session timeouts and secure session handling protocols

    Virtual Private Networks (VPN): Secure remote access channels for authorised personnel

    System Hardening: Operating systems and applications configured according to industry security benchmarks

    Business Continuity: Documented business continuity and disaster recovery plans tested at least annually

    Personal Data Transferred

    Personal data of users you invite to the Platform, including:

    • first and last name

    • email address

    • phone number

    • job title.

    Special Categories of Personal Data and criminal convictions and offences

    Special Categories of Data will not be processed.

    Relevant Data Subjects

    • Your staff members

    • Your customers

    • Anyone about whom personal data is input into the Services

    Frequency of the transfer

    Continuous

    Nature of the transfer

    As specified in the Terms and this DPA, including without limitation:

    • collection, organisation, storage (hosting), retrieval and other processing of Transferred Personal Data necessary for us to provide, maintain and improve the Platform]; and

    • transmission, disclosure and dissemination of Transferred Personal Data to provide the Services in accordance with the Terms or as compelled by law.

    Purpose of processing

    The purpose of the transfer and processing are as specified in the Terms and this DPA.

    Duration of the Processing

    The term of the Terms, and for a period of 30 days after termination or expiry of the Terms, unless otherwise required by law.

    trust.aphex.co
    https://trust.aphex.co/
  • Click Done to close the window

  • token creator
    for each token so you know what’s active and what can be cleaned up.
    A PBIT file will download to your device
  • Project Name (this is just for display inside the report)

  • Click Load

  • Power BI will securely request your project data and load it into the report

  • Since authentication is handled through the bearer token you already entered, no additional credentials are required here:
    • Select “Anonymous” as the authentication method, then click Connect.

    This tells Power BI not to apply any other login method. Using other options like “Windows” or “Organizational Account” may block the request or cause errors.

    at the bottom of the window
  • Make sure that Credentials match:

    • Type: Anonymous

    • Privacy Level: None

  • If needed, select Edit to open the Access Web Content window

  • “We couldn’t authenticate with the credentials provided.”
    • This suggests Power BI could be using the wrong method (e.g. "Organizational Account") instead of Anonymous.

    “The remote server returned an error: (401) Unauthorized.”

    • This means the API blocked the request - often because Power BI tried to use Windows or Organizational credentials instead of the token.

    This usually means the dataset was too large for Power BI to handle in one response.

    “Unable to connect to the data source. The connection was closed before the data could be retrieved.”

    • This can sometimes be triggered when the response is too large and times out during transfer.

    Exclude resource data Append ?resource=false to your API URL → Useful if you don’t need labour or plant or material reporting.

  • Exclude delay status data Append ?status=false to your API URL → Useful if you do not need to report on delay reasons.

    • Exclude blocker data Append ?blockers=false to your API URL → Useful if you do not need to report on blockers.

    You can combine parameters like: ?limit=3&resource=false&status=false

  • Delete your old token and add your new one, then select Save

  • You may need to Reload Data

  • In Power BI Service, go to your workspace → Datasets tab.

  • Find the dataset linked to your Aphex report and click the More Options (⋯) → Settings

  • Set authentication method to Anonymous

    • Under Data source credentials, confirm that the method is set to Anonymous.

    • Also check that Privacy Level is set to None or Public, if prompted.

  • Enable “Skip test connection”

    • To avoid false errors during refresh setup, make sure to enable “Skip test connection”.

    • This setting tells Power BI not to validate the connection in advance, which is fine, because the bearer token is already embedded in the query.

  • Set up scheduled refresh

    • Expand the Scheduled refresh section and turn it on:

    • Choose daily or weekly refresh

  • Save your changes

    • Your dashboard will now stay in sync with the latest Published Plan - no manual exports or updates needed.

    Visit the Microsoft Documentation to learn more about Scheduled Refresh in Power BI

  • Aphex's Resource Hub
    Download a Template
    API Reference Doc
    [email protected]
    API Reference Doc
    Confirm
    Confirm

    Management of Advanced Permissions

    Full access and management of Billing & Subscription

    Management of Advanced Permissions

    Be added to Projects

    Access Aphex Insight

    Open the Admin App

    Manage Org Settings

    Delete the Org

    Manage Org Users

    Provision Paid Seats

    Members & Billing Admin:

    Only possible via Invite User flow

    Downgrade Paid Seats

    Manage Existing Projects

    Manage Billing

    Invite New Members to Org

    Permissions can be customised

    Create New Projects

    Permissions can be customised

    Transfer Projects Between Orgs

    Manage Authentication

    User's Organisation Role

    LastLogin

    The date of the last time the user logged in to the Organisation

    Planner Seat

    Yes/No

    Auth

    How users sign in to the system

    app.aphex.co/sign-up
    Create a Root Folder

    Root Folders sit at the top of your Folder hierarchy - everything else rolls up into them. You can create one directly from the Gantt while planning, or use the Folders Management page to build out your structure more intentionally.

    From the Gantt

    • Make sure that your set to Folders

    • An option to Add Root Folder will appear on the Gantt

    From the Folders Management Page:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Folders from the menu

    • Click

    • Add a Folder Name and update the code if needed

    • Click Save

    • The Folder is added to the project structure, ready for the team to add Tasks into

    Folder Code Logic
    • Each Folder has a unique code

    • If a duplicate code is attempted to be created, the code will autocorrect to <value>[duplicate] until it is edited back to a unique code

    • Folders use a tree-style structure - each level down the tree adds another decimal place to the code, showing its position in the hierarchy

    Create a Subfolder


    Subfolders help you build out your Folder Structure with as much detail as your plan needs. You can nest Subfolders as deep as required - there's no limit!

    From the Folders Management Page:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Folders from the menu

    • Hover over the Folder you would like to add a Subfolder to

    • Click on the + symbol

    • Select Add Sub-Folder

    • Add a Folder Name and update the code if needed

    • Click Save Changes

    • The Subfolder is added to the project structure, ready for the team to add Tasks into

    From the Gantt:

    • Hover over the Folder you are adding to

    • Click on the + symbol

    • Select Add Subfolder

    • Type in the Subfolder Name & select the Create [Folder Name] button

    Protect a Folder


    If parts of your Folder Structure need to stay exactly as they are, you can apply Folder Protection. You can lock down changes to names, codes, position, or structure - including the ability to add Subfolders.

    To Protect a Folder:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Folders from the menu

    • Locate the Folder you'd like to Protect

    • Click the in the State column to cycle through the various Protected States:

      • Default

      • Semi-Protected

      • Protected

    • Click Save Changes

    Protected Folder State Definitions

    Folders will have one three states:

    State
    Edit Name & Code
    Move
    Delete
    Add Subfolder

    Default

    Moving Folders


    Reordering Folders is quick and flexible. Move a single Folder or an entire branch - just remember that the Folder Structure is shared with everyone on the project, so your updates will apply project-wide.

    To move a Folder using Drag & Drop

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Folders from the menu

    • Hover over the Folder name & click and hold to the left of the checkbox

    • Drag the Folder to move it

    • Click Save Changes

    To move a Folder using the Overflow Menu

    • Hover over the Folder & click the ...

    • Select Move to bring up the menu

    • Click on the Folder you want to move to & confirm using the button

    • Click Save Changes

    Moving Branches and Individual Folders
    • Folder codes update to match their new Parent. If you move a Folder, its code prefix will adjust to reflect its new location.

    Move the entire Folder Branch:

    • All your selected Folders (& contained Subfolders) will keep their original nested positions after being moved under the destination Folder.

    Move the selected Folders only:

    • All your selected Folders (& contained Subfolders) will be flattened to the same level under the destination Folder.

    Duplicating Folders


    You can duplicate Folders to help build out your Folder Structure faster – avoiding the need to recreate similar setups manually.

    From the Folders Management Page:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Folders from the menu

    • Hover over the Folder & click the ...

    • Choose one of the two duplication options:

      • Duplicate – duplicates only the selected Folder.

      • Duplicate Branch – duplicates the Folder and all its Sub-Folders.

    • Click Save Changes

    Folder State & Naming
    • All duplicated folders are created in an unprotected state, regardless of the original folder's status.

    • The duplicated folder will copy the name and colour from the original.

    • The folder code will receive a [duplicate] suffix.

    Permissions

    Folder duplication permissions vary based on your role and whether Root Folder Creation is enabled:

    Project Setting
    Admin User Action
    Member User Action

    Admins Only

    Can duplicate any folder or branch.

    All duplication options are disabled.

    Admins & Members (Allow Root Folders: On)

    From the Gantt:

    • Locate the Folder(s) you want to duplicate.

    • Hover over the Folder & click the ...

    • Choose one of the two duplication options:

      • Duplicate – duplicates only the selected Folder and the tasks visible within it.

      • Duplicate Branch – duplicates the Folder, all its Sub-Folders, and the tasks visible within them.

    • Choose one of the two options in the Task Ownership Modal

      • Keep original Owners

      • Assign Ownership to me

    • Click Confirm Duplicate

    Folder State & Naming
    • All duplicated folders are created in an unprotected state, regardless of the original folder's status.

    • The duplicated folder will copy the name and colour from the original.

    • The folder code will receive a [duplicate] suffix.

    Permissions & Task Ownership

    Folder duplication permissions vary based on your role and whether Root Folder Creation is enabled:

    Project Setting
    Admin User Action
    Member User Action

    Admins Only

    Can duplicate any folder or branch.

    All duplication options are disabled.

    Admins & Members (Allow Root Folders: On)

    When duplicating tasks, ownership is handled differently depending on your role and selected option:

    User Role
    Keep Original Owners
    Assign Ownership to Me

    Import Folders from a CSV


    To use the Folder Importer, upload a spreadsheet with both a Code and Name for each Folder.

    To format your Import File:

    The importer works with CSVs exported from other planning tools. If your system doesn’t support folder exports, you can copy folder codes and names manually into our template.

    To run a Folder Import:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Folders from the menu

    • Click

    • Choose either Upload a File or Copy and Paste

    • Add your data (upload CSV or copy and paste)

    • Map both the Folder Code and Name fields

    • Review your data

    • Complete the Import

    See also: import Folders from your Master Schedule

    Folder Import Data Format
    Property
    Format

    Folder Code

    A period-separated code (sometimes called WBS path)

    Example; East.123.A.1

    This would be imported as

    • East

      • 123

        • A

    Folder Name

    Any String

    Importer Logic: Duplicates & Branch Creation
    • The importer automatically warns and excludes any duplicate Folder codes

    • The importer will autocomplete branches where they are missing in the source file.

      For example, a Folder Code imported as East.123.A.1 will automatically create the parent nodes of East, East.123, and East.123.A if they are not included in either the source file or the existing Aphex project

    Deleting Folders


    Folders can be deleted one by one or in bulk - whatever works best for your clean-up.

    To delete a Folder:

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then select Project Assets

    • Select Folders from the menu

    • Hover over the Folder you wish to delete

    • Select ... and then Delete Folder

    Folder Deletion Rules
    • Folders that contain Tasks can not be deleted - the Tasks need to be ejected from the Folder first

    • Deleted Folders are automatically removed from the Project's Structure and Gantt

    • Deleted Folders cannot be restored

    • Opting to delete the entire Folder branch will delete the selected row, and all Folders nested underneath

    Group by Folder


    This organises your Tasks by the Folders they belong to. It's a simple way to view your plan in the same structure used across the Project.

    To Group By Folder on the Gantt:

    • Click the menu in the top left of the Gantt

    • Pick Folder as a Primary Grouping

    To switch between Folder Tree and Flattened Folders:

    • Click the menu in the top left of the Gantt

    • Select the button next to Folder to switch to Flattened Folders

    • Flattened Folders shows only the lowest level Folder for each Task in a single row

      • The full Folder path appears above the Folder Name, saving vertical space

    • Click the same icon again to return to Folder Tree mode

      • Folder Tree shows your full Folder hierarchy, one row per level, so you can see exactly where each Tasks sits in the structure.

    Filter by Folder


    Apply a Folders Filter to see only the Tasks sitting in certain parts of your Project structure.

    To set a Folder Filter:

    • Click and

    • Select Folder in the first dropdown

    • Select the Operator in the second dropdown

      • Is Within to reveal Tasks that sit inside the selected branch

      • Is to reveal Tasks that belong to the specific Folder

    • Pick your Folders in the third dropdown

    • Click Apply Selected

    See also: create & share Views

    Filter Breakdown
    Filter
    Operator
    Value

    Folder

    Is Is Not Is Within Is Not Within Is Empty Is Not Empty

    Multi-select

    Project Users

    Project Roles


    Each user has an Project Role that controls what Tasks they can edit, and what data they can manage inside the Project.

    Project User roles at a Glance:

    Role
    Permissions Include
    Project Role Permission Matrix
    Data
    Admin
    Member
    Notes

    Planner Access


    Seperate from their Project Role, Users either have Full or Limited Planner Access - this defines product functionality access.

    Planner Access
    Entitlement

    Planner access is set per Project, but requires a paid Planner Seat for Full access.

    Planner Access: Full vs Limited
    Functionality
    Full
    Limited

    Managing Planner Access


    Planner Access can be set to Full or Limited for users whether you’re updating one person, multiple users at once, or inviting someone new.

    Set Full Planner Access:

    Open the Project and click your Project Title in the top left, then Users

    • Indiviual Assignment:

      • Locate a specific User in the table

      • Toggle their Planner Access to Full​

    • Bulk Assignment

    These same steps can be taken to set Planner Access to Limited

    Key Access Rules
    • Setting a user’s Planner Access to Full will automatically assign them a paid Planner Seat if they don’t already have one.

    When Organisation-level Seats are removed, Planner Access is automatically adjusted within the User's Projects:⁠

    • Users with Full Planner access will be downgraded to Limited access if their Planner seat is revoked⁠

    Adding Project Users


    To add a new User into your Project:

    • Open the Project and click your Project Title in the top left, then Users

    • Click "Add User" to trigger the Project Add User window

    • Enter email addresses separated by commas⁠

    • The system will validate email formats and check for existing users⁠

    What is the experience for newly Invited Users?
    • Users receive email invitations automatically when added⁠

    • These email invitations will have a shortcut to create an account

    Adding User Rules
    • Adding Users to Projects automatically adds them to the Organisation as Members⁠

    • Assigning Full access may trigger seat allocation and billing⁠

    • Some Organisations limit who can add Users to Projects⁠

    Archiving Project Users


    Archiving a User blocks their access to the Project without deleting their data or records in the Project.

    To Archive a User:

    Open the Project and click your Project Title in the top left, then Users

    • Indiviual Archive:

      • Locate a specific User in the table

      • Hover over their row and click ... then Archive User​

    What Happens When Project Users Are Archived

    Access Blocked

    • Users are blocked from opening the Project

    Cannot Be Allocated New Tasks

    • Other users cannot add archived Users as Task Owners or Assignees

    Restoring an Archived Project User

    Automatic Reactivation: Restores the User's access to the Project and they can plan & be assigned work as before.

    Deleting Project Users


    Deleting a Project User removes all record of that User from your Project. Users must already by archived, and not own any Tasks or Packages before they can be deleted⁠.

    To Delete a Project User:

    Open the Project and click your Project Title in the top left, then Users

    • Indiviual Delete:

      • Locate a specific User in the table

      • Hover over their row and click ... then Delete User​

    What Happens When Users Are Deleted from the Project

    Permanent Removal:

    • Deleting a User fully removes them from the Project. They can’t be restored but they can be re-invited if needed, and will need to be re-added to any Tasks.

    Data Impact:

    Task Delegates


    Task Delegates allow one user to edit all tasks owned by another. For example, if User A is set as a Task Delegate for User B, they can edit any task assigned to User B.

    A user can have multiple Task Delegates, and there’s no limit to how many can be assigned.

    To set a Task Delegate:

    • Open the Project

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then Users

    • Locate the User you want to set a Delegate for

    • Click the + in the Task Delegate column

    See also:

    Task Delegate Permissions

    Task Delegates can interact with a Task with all the same permissions as an Owner, aside from:

    • Making the Task Ready

    Plan Reviewer


    Plan Reviewers create a two-step approval process for weekly plan updates. When a Task Owner marks their work as Ready, their assigned Reviewer gets notified and should review it before the final version is published.

    To set a Plan Reviewer:

    • Open the Project

    • Click your Project Title in the top left, then Users

    • Locate the User you want to set a Reviewer for

    • Click the + in the Plan Reviewer column

    See also:

    Exporting Project Users


    Exporting Project Users allows you to download a CSV file containing user data from the Project Users table.

    To Export Project Users:

    • Open the Project and click your Project Title in the top left, then Users

    • Select at the top right of the table

    Project Users Export Format
    Column
    Description

    Asta Powerproject

    This guide outlines how to prepare your Asta Powerproject file before importing into Aphex. We've included known quirks, export tips, supported file types and small adjustments that can make a big difference once the file is uploaded into your Aphex Project.

    Once you've exported your file, see how to run the import into Aphex:

    Supported Export Formats


    XER

    Privacy Policy

    Purpose and Scope

    At Aphex, we respect your privacy and data protection rights and recognize the importance of protecting the personal data we collect and process. This Privacy Policy is designed to help you to understand what personal data we collect about you and how we use and share it.

    When we refer to Aphex in this Privacy Policy, we mean Aphex Software Limited, a company registered in England and Wales, company registration number 09681747 and register address of 82 Wandsworth Bridge Road, London, United Kingdom, SW6 2TF, and all group companies of Aphex Software Limited, including:

    Manage Project Settings

    Manage Project Permissions

    Add Project Users

    Organisation -controlled

    Manage Project Users

    Create Teams

    Manage Integrations

    Import Tasks via CSV

    Import Master Schedule

    Publish the Plan

    Make Ready

    Manage Publicly Shared Data

    Create and Share Views

    Manage All Views

    Create & Manage Folders

    Project-controlled

    Create & Manage Packages

    Create & Manage Labour

    Create & Manage Plant

    Create & Manage Materials

    Create & Manage Subcontractors

    Create & Manage Locations

    Create & Manage Calendars

    Create & Manage Delay Reasons

    Create & Manage Blockers

    Project-controlled

    Create & Manage Tags

    Project-controlled

    Board Views

    Map Views

    List Views

    Aphex Mobile (List & Map)

    Published Versions

    :
    • Select multiple Users using the checkboxes

    • Use the multi-select toolbar to turn on Full Planner Access for all selected Users⁠⁠​

  • Adding New Users:

    • When using the Add User flow, you can allocate Full Planner Access during the invitation process by toggling their Planner Access to Full

  • This ensures project access never exceeds what's permitted by organisation-level entitlements

    Choose between Admin or Member for their Project Role

  • Toggle the Full or Limited Planner Access options as needed⁠

  • Click

  • Once an account is created, the User will be able to access your Organisation and Project
  • The invite link is optional - invited Users can also sign up directly using their invited email address at app.aphex.co/sign-up

  • Confirm
  • Bulk Archive:

    • Select multiple Users using the checkboxes

    • Use the multi-select toolbar to choose ... then Archive Users​

    • Confirm

  • Status Indication

    • Archived users show as Archived throughout the project

    Billing Impact

    • Archiving a Project User has no impact on their Paid Seat or billing status

    Records Preserved

    • User data and activity history remain intact⁠ on the Project

    Super Admin Protection

    • If archiving a Project Admin, there must be at least one other active Project Admin⁠

    Confirm
  • Bulk Delete:

    • Select multiple Users using the checkboxes

    • Use the multi-select toolbar to choose ... then Delete Users​

    • Confirm

  • Any changes the user made to a task remain in-tact and recorded as a historic event on the Task

    Select one or more Users who should be able to edit all Tasks owned by this User

    Choose one User to act as the Reviewer for that person’s plan

    LastLogin

    The date of the last time the user logged in to the Organisation

    Planner Access

    Full/Limited

    Status

    Archived/Active

    Task Delegate

    Email addresses of the User's Task Delegates

    Plan Reviewer

    Email address of the User's Plan Reviewer

    Project Admin

    Everything. Full control over the Project Users, Settings, Assets, Imports, Publishing & Permissions. Can edit all Tasks in the Project.

    Project Member

    Can make edits to their own Tasks and add new Users to the project⁠.

    Create Tasks

    Edit Tasks

    Full

    Complete access to all Planner features and View types

    Limited

    Restricted to List View only and mobile app access⁠

    Aphex Planner

    Gantt Views

    Name

    User's chosen display name

    Email

    User's email address

    Role

    Task Ownership
    Reviewing Plans

    User's Project Role

  • 1

  • ✓

    ✓

    ✓

    ✓

    Semi-Protected

    -

    -

    -

    ✓

    Protected

    -

    -

    -

    -

    Can duplicate any folder or branch.

    Can duplicate any folder or branch.

    Admins & Members (Allow Root Folders: Off)

    Can duplicate any folder or branch.

    Cannot duplicate root-level folders, but can duplicate any nested folders.

    Can duplicate any folder or branch.

    Can duplicate any folder or branch.

    Admins & Members (Allow Root Folders: Off)

    Can duplicate any folder or branch.

    Cannot duplicate root-level folders, but can duplicate any nested folders.

    Admin

    All duplicated tasks will keep their original owners.

    All duplicated tasks will be assigned to you.

    Member (No Delegate Permissions)

    Tasks owned by other users will be skipped and not duplicated.

    All duplicated tasks will be assigned to you.

    Member (With Delegate Permissions)

    Tasks owned by other users will be skipped unless you have delegate permissions.

    All duplicated tasks will be assigned to you.

    Sample Folder Import

    create new root
    XML
    (Primavera P6 Schema)

    XML ( Microsoft Project Schema)

    MPP

    Visit the Asta Documentation for guidance on how to export to XML (P6) and XER & MPP and XML (MP)

    Choosing the Best Export Format
    File Type
    Best For
    Limitations

    XER & XML (Primavera P6 Schema)

    • Selecting from WBS Code or Natural Order

    • Exporting specific branches

    • Repeating imports over time

    Cannot export filtered view

    MPP and XML (MS Project Schema)

    • Exporting specific branches

    • Exporting filtered views

    • Using WBN or OutlineNumber

    Repeating imports over time is harder if the Asta project name changes, as it affects task identifiers and can cause duplicates

    Filtering your Asta Export


    Often, your delivery team won't need to see every single task in the Master Schedule in Aphex - they just need the right slice of it. Filtering before you export from Asta means the plan you import into Aphex includes only relevant tasks, not cluttered with everything else, like Procurement or Design. There are three main ways to filter, let's take a look at each below.

    Export a Filtered View

    Best For: Quick exports of exactly what’s on screen

    Supported Export Formats: MS Project XML or MPP

    For full details, visit the Asta Documentation to see how to Apply Filters and learn more about the Export Wizard

    How to Export a Filtered View
    • Open your programme in Asta

    • Build a filter to show just the tasks you want (for example, construction activities, a specific date range etc).

      • In Asta: View → Filters → New Filter

      • Apply the filter so your view shows only those tasks

    • Right-click anywhere in the project view (or on a summary group) and select:

      • Export branch or view to Microsoft Project

    • Choose MS Project XML as the export format.

      • In the export wizard, look for the option:

        • Export only visible tasks or “Export current view” (wording can vary by Asta version).

    • Confirm the export - only the tasks visible in the filtered view will be included in the file.

    Export a specific WBS Branch

    Best For: Selecting a complete phase/area/discipline directly from the WBS (one or several branches) and bringing it across intact.

    Supported Exported Formats: MS Project XML or MPP

    For full details, visit the Asta Documentation for exporting to Microsoft Project

    How to Export a Specific WBS Branch
    • In Asta Powerproject, expand the WBS so you can see the branch (summary group) you want to export

    • Select the WBS branch. To export more than one, hold CTRL and click additional branches

    • Right-click the branch and choose:

      • Export branch or view to Microsoft Project.

    • In the Export dialog, select Branch

      • This ensures only the chosen WBS branch (or branches) will be included

    • Confirm Microsoft Project XML as the export format

    Create a Custom Filter with a User Field

    Best For: Granular control over exactly which tasks you want to import, regardless of where they sit in the overall structure.

    Supported Exported Formats: MS Project XML, MPP, P6 XML, XER

    For full details, visit the Asta Documentation to see how to work with User Fields

    How to Create a Custom Filter
    • In Asta, create a new User Field:

      • Project → Properties → User-Defined Fields

        • Type: Task

          • Data type: String

          • Suggested name: Aphex_Import

    • Tag tasks to import

      • Set Aphex_Import = Yes on every task you want to bring into Aphex.

    • Export the project

      • Use your required schema: MS Project XML, MPP, Primavera P6 XML, or XER

      • If the export wizard offers field options, ensure User‑Defined Fields are included

    User Field Limitations for Milestones

    In Asta, Tasks and Milestones are treated as separate object types. If you create a User Field for the Task object, it won’t be applied to Milestones - even if they appear in the same activity list.

    This means that if you're filtering for Milestones alongside Tasks, as the User Field you’ve created is Type = Task and Data type = String, it won’t apply to Milestones - so they won’t pass the "Aphex_Import = Yes" filter during import.

    See also: apply your Custom Filter during the Import Process

    Importing your Asta WBS


    Aphex can build your folder structure from your Asta hierarchy. It only creates Folders for WBS levels that have Tasks included in your import (empty branches aren’t created).

    Your mapping options depend on the export schema you’re using:.

    Map to WBS Code

    What it is: The formal WBS code in the exported file Why pick this: You want folders to follow the project’s formal WBS exactly. Only select this option if you’ve built/assigned WBS codes to activities Supports: Primavera P6 XML and XER

    How to Export with WBS Codes
    • Export to P6 XML or XER

      • Select WBS under WBS options; otherwise Aphex won’t see WBS Code when you run the import

    • → during the Map Fields step:

      • Map Folders = WBS Code

    Visit the for more detail

    Map to Natural Order

    What it is: A hierarchy built from the chart/summary grouping at export time (the “natural” on-screen order) Why pick this: You want Folders to mirror the practical on-screen grouping you used when exporting. Select this option when you’re organising by visible grouping and don’t have WBS codes in place. Supports: Primavera P6 XML and XER

    How to Export with Natural Order
    • Export to P6 XML or XER (with your on-screen grouping set the way you want it reflected)

      • Under WBS, tick Natural order to create the exported WBS from your chart/summary hierarchy

    • → during the Map Fields step:

      • Map Folders = Natural Order

    Visit the for more detail

    Map to OutlineNumber

    What it is: An automatic path like 1.2.3 that shows a task’s exact position in the outline Why pick this: You want Folders to mirror the on-screen outline from an MS Project-schema export Supports: MS Project XML and MPP

    How to Export with OutlineNumber
    • Export to Microsoft Project XML

    • Make sure the Code Libraries box is not selected

    • → during the Map Fields step:

      • Map Folders = OutlineNumber

    Visit the for more detail

    Map to Task ID (WBN)

    What is it: Asta’s Work Breakdown Number assigned to each task. It’s a hierarchical, generated identifier (often looks like 1.2.3). It isn’t the formal WBS code; it’s Asta’s task ID scheme Why pick this: If your team already references WBNs and wants that familiar structure reflected in Aphex Supports: MS Project XML

    How to Export with Task ID (WBN)
    • In Asta, export to Microsoft Project XML

    • Whole project: File → Import/Export → Export to Microsoft Project

    • → during the Map Fields step:

      • Map Folders = Task ID (WBN)

    There’s no additional checkbox to 'include WBN' - if WBN codes exist in your project, Asta writes them into the MS Project XML and Aphex will expose them as Task ID (WBN) during mapping.

    Visit the for more detail

    Importing Tasks with Owners, Subcontractors, Locations or Notes


    By default, Aphex imports all core task & relationship data from your export.

    If you've already captured extra information in Asta, like Owner, Location, Subcontractor or Notes, you can pull these into Aphex too, using Asta's Task-level User Fields.

    If you don't - that's no problem! It's easy and quick to apply the same edits in the Aphex plan.

    To import optional properties into Aphex:

    • Create a User Field in Asta:

      • Select Task in the Object type dropdown

      • Choose String as the Field type

      • We've suggest naming it something descriptive, like Aphex_Subcontractor

    • Add this new User Field as a column in your Asta view

    • For each Task you're importing, add in the value (the Subcontractor name, in this example) in the relevant cell

    Repeat for any other optional property you want to import.

    Also: How to map User Fields during the Import Process

    For full details on creating and managing User Fields, visit the Asta Powerproject documentation.

    How to format User Fields
    Aphex Property
    Value
    Suggested UF Name

    Subcontractor

    Subcontractor Name

    Aphex_Subcontractor

    Owner

    Owner's Aphex Email Address

    Aphex_Owner

    • For Subcontractor and Location, insert the value for each relevant activity.

      • If the value already exists in your Aphex Project, the imported Tasks will automatically be assigned to the relevant Subcontractor or Location

      • If the value is unique, Aphex will create a new Subcontractor or Location and assign the imported tasks to the newly created asset

    Metadata Aphex creates by default

    Regardless of whether you’re using User Fields to bring in optional properties, Aphex will always automatically create the following from your Asta Powerproject file:

    • Task Name

    • Start Date

    • End Date

    • Duration

    • Calendar

    • Relationship Links

    User Field Limitations for Milestones

    In Asta, Tasks and Milestones are treated as separate object types. If you create a User Field (UF) for the Task object, it won’t be applied to Milestones - even if they appear in the same activity list.

    This means that if you're importing Milestones alongside Tasks, any values for optional fields like Subcontractor, Owner, Location, or Notes won’t carry over for Milestones. You can still add them manually in Aphex after the import.

    Known Limitations and Workarounds


    Summary Bars

    Asta’s Summary Bars are used to group and structure Tasks in a hierarchical plan. In Asta, they’re a distinct Object Type.

    However, when imported into Aphex, Summary Bars are treated as regular Tasks, which can result in duplication if the Tasks they summarise are also imported.

    How to avoid creating duplicates
    • If Summary Bars are used purely for grouping, consider filtering them out before export to avoid duplicating detail tasks.

    • Alternatively, if you’re looking to bring in a high-level version of the programme, you can choose to import just the Summary Bars for a top-line plan.

    Mid-Links

    Mid‑Links are a type of logic link in Asta where the dependency connects to or from the middle of an activity, rather than the start or finish.

    To keep things as simple as possible for end users, Aphex doesn’t handle mid‑link logic - all links must connect to either the start or end of a task.

    Additionally, as mid-links aren’t supported in P6 or MS Project, Asta converts them during export to XML or XER to the closest matching link type.

    Things to consider if you're using mid-links

    There's no perfect fix for mid-links, since Aphex doesn't support them, and by the time your file reaches us, Asta has already converted them to standard logic links. Here are a few ways you can approach this:

    • Review mid-links before exporting

      • If there are only a few, it might be worth replacing them with simpler link types, or removing them if they're not essential

    • Export a logic free version

      • If you have prolific use of mid-links, you might explore exporting a copy of the file with no dependencies at all. This avoids misinterpreted links entirely, and will ensure that all imported activities land on their correct dates. This could be a good option to consider if you're only bringing in high-level activities that the team will be breaking down and detailing anyway, or just the key milestones that they can build towards

    • Be ready for some variance

      • If mid-links stay in, expect some differences in how tasks relate to each other in Aphex

    Partial Day Tasks

    In Aphex, the smallest possible task duration is one day.

    This works well once tasks are in Aphex, but it can cause changes if you’re importing from a Master Schedule where some tasks are shorter than a full day.

    Aphex automatically handles these adjustments during the import process, which should result in sequenced tasks remaining aligned on the correct dates, without you needing to do anything.

    What Aphex automatically does with partial day Tasks
    • Every task is rounded up to a minimum of one full day

      • E.g a Task that was 3 hours becomes 1 day.

      • A Task that started at 9pm and finished at 9am becomes two full days

    • We add -1 day lag to successor logic links to offset the extra time

      • E.g if you had three 1 hour tasks linked in a F>S chain all happening on the same day, we automatically convert them each to 1 day tasks, and subtract one day of lag from each relationship.

      • This keeps all tasks starting on the same day, matching your Master Schedule, while still meeting our minimum duration requirement

    Constraints

    To keep Aphex as simple as possible, constraints are not supported (e.g., “Must Start On”, “Start No Earlier Than”). When you import from Asta, Aphex will schedule from links, durations, start date and calendars. As a result, tasks that were being “held” by constraints in the source file can move once imported and be a source of variance.

    Running Subsequent Imports from the same Asta project


    Aphex assumes the lookahead inside Aphex is most up-to-date version of the plan, once tasks are imported. On later imports, existing Aphex tasks are not overwritten. Imports only ever create new tasks (i.e., tasks that don’t already exist in Aphex).

    How matching works (identity)

    Aphex matches “same task as before” using the External ID which is automatically mapped during import:

    • Primavera P6 XML / XER: maps External ID = Activity ID

    • MS Project XML / MPP: maps External ID = <projectname>_<taskUniqueId>

      • <projectname> is the name of the MS Project file

    • (WBN / OutlineNumber / WBS Code / Natural Order control folder structure, not Task identity.)

    Rule: if the External ID in the incoming file matches an Aphex task’s External ID, Aphex treats it as “already imported” and does not update it.

    Use Aphex to update your Asta Schedule


    Often, your Master Schedule is contractual, so nothing should change by accident. Aphex shows what’s moved and why; updates back to Asta stay manual, deliberate, and on your terms.

    What Aphex gives you:

    • Weekly Published Versions & Import Baselines - snapshots you can compare against.

    • Variance Reports & Exports - quickly see what changed since the last baseline (date moves, duration changes, new/removed tasks, completion).

    • External ID awareness - imported tasks carry the Asta identity, even when imported Tasks have been broken down into subtasks, so you can still line them up 1:1 when editing in Asta.

    Ways to Track Variance & Compare Baselines

    From the Gantt: Baseline Overlay Task Data Export

    From Power BI: Connect to Power BI Plan Comparison Dashboard

    From Aphex Insight: View the Variance Report and Download the Variance CSV

    Master Schedule Import
    Aphex Australia Pty Ltd (ABN: 13 628 119 648)

    ("Aphex", "we", "us", "our").

    This Privacy Policy applies to you if you:

    • interact with any of Aphex’s websites (including aphex.co, app.aphex.co, help.aphex.co) or our social media pages (collectively, the "Sites") ("website users");

    • visit any of Aphex’s premises ("office visitors");

    • attend an Aphex event or an event which Aphex sponsors ("event attendees");

    • use Aphex's applications and services, to the extent that we are acting as a controller of your personal data (collectively, the "Aphex Services") ("customers");

    • interact with any shared data from Aphex's Apps (including shared reports and plans ("guests");

    • are a marketing prospect, who is anyone whose data Aphex processes for the purposes of assessing customer eligibility ("marketing prospect"); or

    • receive marketing communications from Aphex.

    This Privacy Policy takes into account the General Data Protection Regulation 2016/679 (EU GDPR) for individuals located in the European Union or European Economic Area, and General Data Protection Regulation (EU) 2016/679) (UK GDPR) and the Data Protection Act 2018 (DPA 2018). In this Privacy Policy, the EU GDPR and UK GDPR are together referred to as the GDPR. This Privacy Policy also takes into account the requirements of the Australian Privacy Act 1988 (Cth) and the Australian Privacy Principles, as well as the New Zealand Privacy Act 2020 and the Information Privacy Principles.

    Role under the GDPR

    For the purposes of the GDPR, this Privacy Policy covers personal data that we collect and process in our capacity as a controller of personal data. Where you are invited to access the Aphex Services by a business, that business is the ‘controller’ of any personal data that you input into the Services (“End User Data”), and we act as a data processor to process your End User Data on behalf of the controller organisation. The controller is responsible for complying with any regulations or laws that require providing notice, disclosure, and/or obtaining your consent prior to transferring the End User Data to us to process on their behalf, therefore End User Data is not covered by this Privacy Policy. You should view the controller’s privacy policy and/or contact the controller to understand their privacy practices in relation to your End User Data.

    Our Data Protection Officer can be contacted in writing at [email protected].

    Personal Data Collected by Aphex

    Personal Data We Collect and Receive

    The personal data that we collect about you broadly falls into the categories set out in the following table. Some of this information you provide voluntarily when you interact with the Aphex Services and Sites, or when you attend an event or visit our premises. Other types of information may be collected indirectly from your device, such as device data and service data (and in cases where cookies are used to collect this data, subject to your consent). From time to time, we may also receive personal data about you from third party sources (as further described in the table).

    We may collect the following personal data about:

    • our website users;

    • recipients of marketing communications; and

    • marketing prospects.

    1. Registration, contact, and company information:

    • first and last names;

    • email addresses;

    • phone numbers;

    • avatars;

    • company name;

    • your role in your company.

    2. Payment information:

    • credit card information;

    • billing and mailing addresses;

    • other payment-related information.

    3. Device data:

    • operating system type and version number, manufacturer and model;

    • browser type;

    • screen resolution;

    • IP address;

    • unique device identifiers.

    4. Service data:

    • the website you visited before browsing to the Aphex Services;

    • how long you spent on a page or screen;

    • how you interact with our emails;

    • navigation paths between pages or screens;

    • date and time;

    • pages viewed;

    • links clicked.

    5. Third party source data:

    • profile information gathered from social networking sites;

    • information that you have viewed or interacted with our content;

    • company information;

    • job titles;

    • avatars;

    • email addresses;

    • phone numbers;

    • addresses;

    6. Geolocation data

    • The sources of this third party personal data may include:

    • Contact enrichment and lead generation providers; and

    • Targeted online advertising providers

    We may collect the following personal data about our office visitors:

    1. Registration, contact and company information:

    • first and last names;

    • email addresses;

    • phone numbers;

    • company name;

    2. Visitation Data

    • time and date of arrival;

    • photograph ID;

    • signature;

    • CCTV footage.

    We may collect the following personal data about event attendees:

    1. Registration, contact and personal information:

    • first and last names;

    • email addresses;

    • phone numbers;

    • mailing addresses;

    • company name;

    • your role in your company.

    2. Visitation Data

    • time and date of arrival;

    • photograph ID;

    • signature;

    • CCTV footage.

    3. Third party source data:

    • first and last names;

    • email addresses;

    • phone numbers;

    • mailing addresses;

    • company name;

    • your role in your company.

    4. The sources of this third party personal data may include:

    • The event organizer

    We may collect the following personal data about our customers and guests (to the extent applicable):

    1. Registration and contact information:

    • first and last names;

    • email addresses;

    • phone numbers;

    • mailing addresses;

    • company name;

    • your role in your company.

    2. Payment information:

    • credit card information;

    • billing and mailing addresses;

    • other payment-related information.

    3. Device data:

    • operating system type and version number, manufacturer and model;

    • browser type and language;

    • screen resolution;

    • IP address;

    • unique device identifiers.

    4. Service data:

    • the website you visited before browsing to the services;

    • how long you spent on a page or screen;

    • navigation paths between pages or screens;

    • session date and time; activity status (including first seen, last seen, last heard from - and last contacted);

    • pages viewed;

    • links clicked;

    • language preferences

    • tags applied within customer accounts

    • Aphex assigned user identifier.

    5. Third party source data

    • profile information gathered from social networking sites;

    • information that you have viewed or interacted with our content;

    • company information;

    • job titles;

    • avatars;

    • email addresses;

    • phone number;

    • approximate geolocation data.

    Where cookie consent (under applicable laws) is required to collect any of the above personal data, the collection will be subject to your consent.

    Cookies and Other Tracking Technologies

    Some device data, service data and third party source data is collected through the use of first or third party cookies and similar technologies. Aphex Apps do not collect, retain, or share data regarding a particular user's activity across multiple websites or applications that are not owned by Aphex. Aphex does assign each user a unique user ID within the scope of an individual website, but does not collect or retain IP or any information that would allow Aphex to identify the same particular user on more than one website. For more information, please see Aphex's Cookie Policy.

    Do Not Track. Some Internet browsers may be configured to send "Do Not Track" signals to the online services that you visit. We currently do not respond to "Do Not Track" or similar signals. To find out more about "Do Not Track," please visit http://www.allaboutdnt.com.

    How and why we use your Personal Data

    We collect and process personal data about you only where we have legal bases for doing so under applicable laws. We have set out below, in a table format, a description of all the ways we plan to use your personal data, and which of the legal bases we rely on to do so. We have also identified what our legitimate interests are where appropriate. Note that we may process your personal data for more than one lawful ground depending on the specific purpose for which we are using your data. Please reach out to us if you need further details about the specific legal ground we are relying on to process your personal data where more than one ground has been set out in the table below.

    Purpose of use / disclosure

    Legal Basis for processing

    Providing and facilitating delivery of the Aphex Services, including to provide you with a login.

    • Performance of a contract with you

    Providing and facilitating delivery of the Aphex Site

    • Legitimate interests: to facilitate the function of our Aphex Site.

    To contact and communicate with you about the Aphex Services, including in response to any support requests you lodge with us or other enquiries you make with us.

    • Performance of a contract with you

    • Legitimate interests: to administer the Aphex Services, including to inform you of the availability or security of the Aphex Services.

    To contact and communicate with you about any enquiries you make with us via our website.

    • Legitimate interests: to ensure we provide the best client experience we can offer by answering all of your questions.

    For internal record keeping, audit, anti-fraud, administrative, invoicing and billing purposes.

    • Performance of a contract with you

    • To comply with a legal obligation

    • Legitimate interests: to recover debts due to us and ensure we can notify you about changes to our terms of business and any other administrative points.

    For analytics, market research and business development, including to operate and improve the Aphex Services and Sites.

    • Legitimate interests: to keep our website updated and relevant, to develop our business, improve our Services and to inform our marketing strategy.

    In certain circumstances, we may collect your personal data on a different legal basis. If we do, or if we use your personal data for purposes that are not compatible with, or are materially different than, the purposes described in this notice or the point of collection, we will explain how and why we use your personal data in a supplementary notice at or before the point of collection. Where we refer to legal bases in this section we mean the legal grounds on which we can rely when processing personal data.

    Sharing your Personal Data

    1. We may disclose some or all of the personal data we collect to the following third parties:

    • To Aphex Group Companies:

      • Aphex Software Limited;

      • Aphex Australia Pty Ltd;

      • Any such other group companies as may be added to this list from time to time.

    • Our employees and contractors

    • Service Providers:

      • Consultants and vendors engaged by us to support our provision of the Aphex Services and Sites and the operation of our business, including IT service providers, data storage, web-hosting and server providers, marketing or advertising providers, payment systems operators, and including those service providers set out on our , from time to time; and

      • third-party AI providers such as Open AI and Anthropic.

    • Professional Advisors:

      • Professional advisors, such as lawyers, auditors and insurers, in the course of the professional services that they render to us.

    • Compliance with Law Enforcement:

      • Comply with applicable laws, lawful requests, and legal process, such as to respond to subpoenas or requests from government authorities;

      • Protect our, your or others’ rights, privacy, safety or property (including by making and defending actual or prospective legal claims);

      • Enforce the terms and conditions that govern the Services; and

    • Business Transfers:

      • Parties to transactions or potential transactions (and their professional advisors) involving a corporate divestiture, merger, consolidation, acquisition, reorganization, sale or other disposition of all or any portion of the business, assets, or equity interests of Aphex Group Companies (including, as part of a bankruptcy or similar proceeding).

    • Analytics businesses:

      • Third parties to collect and process data, such as Google Analytics (To find out how Google uses data when you use third party websites or applications, please see www.google.com/policies/privacy/partners/ or any other URL Google may use from time to time), Meta Pixel or other relevant analytics businesses.

    1. Aggregated or anonymised information. We may also share aggregated or anonymised information with third parties for other purposes. Such information does not identify you individually, but may include usage, viewing and technical information such as the websites you generally use, the configuration of your computer, and performance metrics related to the use of websites which we collect through our technology, products and services. If we are required under applicable law to treat such information as personal data, then we will only disclose it as described above. Otherwise, we may disclose such anonymised information for any reason.

    Retention of your Personal Data

    1. We retain your personal data only for as long as necessary to fulfill the purposes set out in this Privacy Policy, or as otherwise required under law. If you would like more information about specific retention periods please contact [email protected]

    2. Note that content you create may remain on the Sites even if you cease using the Sites or we terminate access to the Sites.

    3. We will process End User Data for as long as is required and/or permitted under the relevant data processing agreement between us and the controller entity, unless required to be retained by law.

    Transfers of your Personal Data

    1. The Aphex Services and Sites, are provided and hosted globally by Google Cloud. Unless otherwise specified, we may transfer, and process, your personal data outside of the country in which you are resident to other Aphex Group Companies and our service providers including to the UK, Australia and other such countries as we deem appropriate from time to time. These countries may not have equivalent privacy and data protection laws (and, in some cases, may not be as protective). We will protect your personal data in accordance with this Privacy Policy wherever it is processed.

    2. Certain recipients (our service providers and other companies) who process your personal data on our behalf may also transfer personal data outside the country in which you are resident. Where such transfers occur, we will make sure that an appropriate transfer mechanism is put in place to protect your personal data.

    EU and UK - Your Privacy Rights and Choices

    1. If you are a resident of the EEA or the UK you have the following data protection rights:

    • Access: You may request details of the personal data that we hold about you and how we process it (commonly known as a “data subject request”). If you wish to access, correct, update or request deletion of your personal data, you can do so at any time by using the contact details below.

    • Processing and portability: You can object to processing of your personal data, ask us to restrict processing of your personal data or request portability of your personal data.

    • Unsubscribe: You have the right to opt-out of marketing communications we send you at any time. If you no longer wish to receive our newsletter and promotional communications, you may opt-out of receiving them by clicking on the "unsubscribe" or "opt-out" link in the communications we send you. Please note, however, that it may not be possible to opt-out of certain service-related communications. You can let us know at any time if you do not wish to receive marketing messages by contacting us on the Aphex Messenger or by contacting us using the contact details below.

    • Withdraw consent: If we have collected and process your personal data with your consent, then you can withdraw your consent at any time. Withdrawing your consent will not affect the lawfulness of any processing we conducted prior to your withdrawal, nor will it affect processing of your personal information conducted in reliance on lawful processing grounds other than consent.

    • Information from third parties: If we receive personal data about you from a third party, we will protect it as set out in this Privacy Policy. If you are a third party providing personal data about somebody else, you represent and warrant that you have such person’s consent to provide the personal data to us.

    • Complaints: If you wish to make a complaint, please contact us using the details below and provide us with full details of the complaint. We will promptly investigate your complaint and respond to you, in writing, setting out the outcome of our investigation and the steps we will take to deal with your complaint. You have the right to complain to a data protection authority about our collection and use of your personal information. For more information, please contact your local data protection authority. Contact details for data protection authorities in the EEA and the UK are available . We would, however, appreciate the chance to deal with your concerns before you approach the relevant data protection authority, so please contact us in the first instance.

    1. You can exercise any of these rights by submitting a request to our Data Protection Officer at [email protected].

    AU and NZ - Your Privacy Rights and Choices

    1. If you are a resident of Australia or New Zealand, you have the following data protection rights:

    • Your choice: Please read this Privacy Policy carefully. If you provide personal information to us, you understand we will collect, hold, use and disclose your personal information in accordance with this Privacy Policy. You do not have to provide personal information to us, however, if you do not, it may affect our ability to do business with you.

    • Information from third parties: If we receive personal information about you from a third party, we will protect it as set out in this Privacy Policy. If you are a third party providing personal information about somebody else, you represent and warrant that you have such person’s consent to provide the personal information to us.

    • Restrict and unsubscribe: To object to processing for direct marketing/ unsubscribe from our email database or opt-out of communications (including marketing communications), please contact us using the details below or opt-out using the opt-out facilities provided in the communication.

    • Access: You may request access to the personal information that we hold about you. An administrative fee may be payable for the provision of such information. Please note, in some situations, we may be legally permitted to withhold access to your personal information. If we cannot provide access to your information, we will advise you as soon as reasonably possible and provide you with the reasons for our refusal and any mechanism available to complain about the refusal. If we can provide access to your information in another form that still meets your needs, then we will take reasonable steps to give you such access.

    • Correction: If you believe that any information we hold about you is inaccurate, out of date, incomplete, irrelevant or misleading, please contact us using the details below. We will take reasonable steps to promptly correct any information found to be inaccurate, out of date, incomplete, irrelevant or misleading. Please note, in some situations, we may be legally permitted to not correct your personal information. If we cannot correct your information, we will advise you as soon as reasonably possible and provide you with the reasons for our refusal and any mechanism available to complain about the refusal.

    • Complaints: If you wish to make a complaint, please contact us using the details below and provide us with full details of the complaint. We will promptly investigate your complaint and respond to you, in writing, setting out the outcome of our investigation and the steps we will take in response to your complaint. If you are not satisfied with our response, you may contact the Office of the Australian Information Commissioner (if you are an Australian resident), or the Office of the New Zealand Privacy Commissioner (if you are a New Zealand resident).

    Links to other websites

    Our website may contain links to other party's websites. We do not have any control over those websites and we are not responsible for the protection and privacy of any personal data which you provide whilst visiting those websites. Those websites are not governed by this Privacy Policy.

    Amendments

    We may change this Privacy Policy from time to time. We will notify you if we make a significant change to this Privacy Policy, by contacting you through the contact details you have provided to us and by publishing an updated version on our website.

    Contact details

    For any questions or notices in relation to this Privacy Policy regarding Aphex Software Limited, please contact us at:

    Aphex Software Limited, a company registered in England and Wales, with company number 09681747

    C/O: Data Protection Officer

    Email: [email protected]

    For any questions or notices in relation to this Privacy Policy regarding Aphex Australia Pty Ltd, please contact us at:

    Aphex Australia Pty Ltd, a company registered in Australia, with company number 13 628 119 648.

    Email: [email protected]

    Gantt

    Who can use this feature?

    Project Users with Full Planner Access can create and open Gantt Views.

    Group the Gantt


    Gantt Views can be grouped by different properties within your plan to organise your Tasks in different ways.

    To change how the Gantt is Grouped:

    • Click the menu in the top left of the Gantt

    • Select a Primary Grouping. Pick from Folder, Owner, Package, Shift or Location

    • Optionally, select a Sub-Grouping to apply another level of structure beneath the Primary Group

    To Collapse and Expand Groups:

    • Click the menu in the top left of the Gantt

    • Select either Collapse All or Expand All

    Group By Rules
    • Choose a Primary and Sub Grouping to shape how your Gantt is displayed e.g. Group by Subcontractor, then by Shift, to see separate swimlanes for each combo

    • The layout updates instantly as you change grouping options

    Setting the Date Range


    Gantt Views are very flexible and allow you to visualise any set of Tasks over time.

    To change the visible Date Range on the Gantt:

    • Click at the top of the Gantt

      • Yours might also look similar to or

    • From the dropdown, select the Date Range you'd like to apply

    Date Range Options
    Date Range
    Range

    Filtering the Gantt


    Filters in Aphex let you show only what matters, whether that’s Tasks with certain properties, or ones that are missing something. Keep it simple or build something more detailed, it's up to you.

    To filter the Tasks you see in a Gantt View:

    • Click at the top of the Gantt

    • In the dropdown that appears select and choose the property you'd like to filter by

    • Change the logic from options like or to or to hide or reveal the relevant Tasks

    • Click to swap between and

    Using Filter Groups:

    • Groups are helpful when combining logic and logic in your filter

    • Click to create an additional filter group

    See also: creating & sharing

    Filter Logic and Rules
    • All as well as can be applied as a filter

    • Archived values that are still in use will appear as filter options. Unused archived values will be hidden from the filter options

    Gantt Empty States & Hidden Items


    If your Gantt looks empty, it's usually because settings like Filters, your Date Range, or the Hide Empty Groups toggle are hiding your tasks or groups. Aphex provides clear messages and icons to help you adjust your view.

    Empty Gantt Message:

    When no tasks or groups are visible, a message will appear in the Gantt:

    Looks like your Gantt is empty Try adjusting or to reveal activities and groups

    To reveal your tasks, simply click the highlighted or in the message to open the relevant panel and adjust your view settings.

    Hidden Groups Notification:

    When the Hide Empty Groups toggle is active, a notification appears at the top of the Gantt if any groups (Folder, Location, Owner, Package, Shift or Subcontractor) are hidden as a result:

    [X] Hidden [Group Type] Adjust your and configuration to reveal hidden groups

    To reveal hidden groups:

    • Click the highlighted or in the message to open the relevant panel and adjust your view settings.

    • Open [View Settings Icon] and set the Hide Empty Groups toggle to [Toggle Off Icon].

    Hidden Items in Folders:

    Look for the next to a Folder Row. This icon indicates the folder contains subfolders, but they are hidden by your current Filters, Date Range, or Hide Empty Toggle.

    To temporarily reveal the hidden folers:

    • Click the next to the folder name. This displays the contents without changing your overall Gantt view.

    Task Sort Order


    Tasks on the Gantt will always be sorted by Start Date - the earlier a Task starts, the higher it will appear within it's grouping.

    Aphex will hold the position of your Tasks while you make edits, and then when you're ready to re-apply the Sort Order, click in the bottom left corner.

    Refreshing your Aphex window will also trigger the sort order to be re-applied to your Gantt View.

    Sort Order Logic

    The Gantt Sort Order is fixed, and will always follow this logic:

    • First it will sort tasks by Start Date

    • If the Start Date is the same, it will then check End Date

    Gantt Zoom


    You can view your projects on a range of time scales, from a single day to a full year:

    • Head to the bottom-right corner of your Gantt

    • Use the menu to switch between Day, Week, Month, or Year

    • The Gantt will instantly update to show your plan on the scale you’ve selected

    Overlays


    Overlays let you layer in things like baselines, critical path visibility, or daily resource demand. This means you can add extra context to your Gantt without changing up or leaving your View.

    To turn Overlays on and off:

    • Click at the top off the Gantt

    • Select from Resource, Baseline, Critical Path

    • To compare the Live Plan to a previous week, select Baseline

    See also: and

    Group Dates & Durations


    When viewing your Gantt, Aphex automatically calculates a Start Date, End Date, and Duration for Folders, Packages, and Parent Tasks. These adjust based on what’s visible in your View and which working calendar you chose to apply.

    To change your Group Duration Calendar:

    • Click

    • Select Group Duration Calendar

    • Choose one out of: Project Default, 5 Day Week, 7 Day Week

    To view Group Durations & Dates on the Gantt:

    • Open the Column Picker and toggle Duration or Start / End

    • These values change dynamically with Filters or Date Range updates

    • Filtered values are marked with a icon so you know they’ve been adjusted

    See also:

    Group Duration Calendar Options
    Calendar Option
    Description

    Group Dates & Duration Calculations

    Start Date

    • Start date of the earliest visible Task

    End Date

    • End date of the latest visible Task

    Gantt Columns & Cells


    Turn on any Task Property as a spreadsheet-style column, then click into cells to edit, bulk-fill, or paste across Tasks.

    To hide and show Gantt Columns:

    • Click the Column Picker towards the top left of the Gantt

    • Set the toggles to or to hide or reveal any combination of columns

    • Once a column is enabled, select any cell to change the value

    Keyboard Shortcuts

    Below are the keyboard shortcuts that can be used on the Gantt View

    Action
    Shortcut

    Task Bar Colours & Icons


    Every colour and icon on the Gantt tells you something. Whether it’s a Milestone, a delay, or who is responsible for the work - you can choose what shows and how it looks.

    To change the colour of Task Bars:

    • Click in the top right of the Gantt

    • Select Bar Colour

    • Choose how you’d like to colour the Gantt; by Subcontractor, Shift, or Owner

    To identify different Icons on the Gantt:

    • Milestones will appear as and any associated Target Dates will be if slipped and if on track

    • Overdue Blockers will be represented with next to the end of the Task

    • Delays are shown as a on the Task Bar, displaying the total amount of days the Task has been delayed by

    • Click and toggle

    See also:

    Additional Gantt View Options
    • Show or hide Relationship links

    • share, duplicate, or delete your saved Gantt Views


    Gantt Search

    Use the Gantt search to quickly find Tasks. As you type, matching Tasks are highlighted and jumped into view automatically.

    To Search for Tasks:

    • Click into the Search Bar in the top left of the Gantt

    • Type in your search term

    • Press Enter on your keyboard or click the < and > icons to cycle through all matching Tasks

    Prevent, identify, investigate and deter fraudulent, harmful, unauthorized, unethical or illegal activity, including cyberattacks and identity theft.

    For advertising and marketing, including to send you promotional information about our events and experiences and information that we consider may be of interest to you.

    • Legitimate interests: to develop our Services and grow our business.

    For health and safety purposes, where you visit our offices.

    • Performance of a contract with you.

    • Legitimate interests: to protect our premises and confidential information against unauthorised access and the safety of our staff and office visitors.

    To manage event registrations and attendance

    • Performance of a contract with you.

    To maintain the security of the Aphex Services and Sites.

    • Legitimate interests: to control unauthorised use or abuse of the Aphex Services and Sites, or otherwise detect, investigate or prevent activities that may violate Aphex policies or applicable laws.

    To comply with our legal obligations or if otherwise required or authorised by law.

    • To comply with a legal obligation.

    Subprocessor List
    here

    Make sure this is selected - otherwise, Asta will export the entire schedule.

    For Owner, insert the email address of the activity’s owner.

    • Check that this matches the email address the team member uses for Aphex. This will ensure the Tasks are automatically assigned to the correct user.

    • If not, the address entered will receive an invite to join the Aphex project.

  • For Notes, they will automatically be added as a text note to the specific imported activity

  • <taskUniqueId> is the unique task ID from the file
  • E.g. if you have a task with ID 123 in a file called "aphex-program-2.0", the External ID would be aphex-program-2.0_123.

  • Location

    Location Name

    Aphex_Location

    Notes

    Free Text

    Aphex_Notes

    Import to Aphex
    Asta Documentation
    Import to Aphex
    Asta Documentation
    Import to Aphex
    Asta Documentation
    Import to Aphex
    Asta Documentation
  • When Hide Empty Primary Groups is , only Groups that contain visible Tasks will show on the Gantt. Any Groups without Tasks in your current View will be hidden.

  • All Primary groupings, except Folders, can be rearranged into a custom order, per user
  • Sub Groupings only show groups that contain tasks - empty groups won’t appear

  • Folder Grouping can be switched between a nested Tree Mode and a Flattened Mode, which condenses the Folder path into a single row to save vertical space on the Gantt

  • Prior Week + Current Week + Next 25 weeks

    Next 12 Months

    Prior Week + Current Week + Next 51 Weeks

    All Future Tasks

    Last 7 Days + All Future

    Project to Date

    From First Task + 7 Days into the Future

    Custom Dates

    Custom dates selected by the user

    Tasks that do not match the filter criteria will be hidden from the Gantt
    If the End Date is the same, it will then apply Alphanumeric sorting

    This will show a list of all Published Versions, and all Master Schedule Imports

  • Select any option to see how how your current plan compares to your baseline

  • Hover over the icon to see:

    • The Filtered value

    • The Total value

    This setting only affects how Durations are displayed for Folders, Packages, and Parent Tasks. It doesn’t change individual Task calendars or impact other users.

    When a plan is published, Group Durations are always calculated using a 5 day workweek (Monday–Friday).

    Duration
    • Spans the Start → End Date of the group

    • Uses your selected Group Duration Calendar

    • Measured in working days of the selected Calendar

    User columns

    Ctrl + 4

    Resource columns

    Ctrl + 5

    Map columns

    Ctrl + 6

    Structure columns

    Ctrl + 7

    Other columns

    Ctrl + 8

    Copy

    Ctrl + C

    Paste

    Ctrl + V

    Select multiple cells

    Shift + Click (cell)

    Select multiple tasks

    Shift + Click (checkbox)

    Undo

    Ctrl + Z

    New line

    Shift + Enter

    Move task and break links

    Shift + Click + Drag (task)

    Duplicate Task

    Ctrl + D

    If you have a Mac computer, you can use cmd

    Your Gantt will update instantly to reflect the new colour scheme

    Show Progress
    and
    Show Overdue Blockers to hide these Icons from the Gantt

    X Week Lookahead

    Prior Week + Current Week + (Project Lookahead Period - 1 Week)

    Next 30 Days

    Last 7 Days + Next 30 Days

    Next 3 Months

    Prior Week + Current Week + Next 12 Weeks

    Project Default

    Respects the non-working days of your Project's Default Calendar

    5 Day Week

    (Mon–Fri) Static calendar

    7 Day Week

    (Mon–Sun) Static calendar

    All columns

    Ctrl + 1

    All required columns

    Ctrl + 2

    Time columns

    Views
    Resource Overlay
    Critical Path
    Task Calendars
    Print Gantt

    Next 6 Months

    Ctrl + 3

    Terms of Service

    Welcome to Aphex! We provide a cloud-based platform (Platform) for construction project coordination and delivery.

    In these terms and conditions (Terms), when we say you or your, we mean, you, the entity entering into these Terms. If you are an individual, we mean the entity you are authorised to represent and for which you act (such as your employer). If you are using the Platform on behalf of your employer or a business entity, you, in your individual capacity, represent and warrant that you are authorised to act on behalf of your employer or the business entity and to bind the entity and the entity’s personnel to these Terms.

    Our entity which you will enter into this contract with will depend on where you are incorporated or domiciled or your specific agreement with us. In the event of no explicit superseding agreement the default terms are:

    • where you are incorporated or domiciled in Australia, these Terms will be entered into between you and Aphex Australia Pty Ltd (ABN 13 628 119 648) (we, us or our); or

    • where you are incorporated or domiciled in any other region other than Australia, these Terms will be entered into between you and Aphex Software Limited, a company registered in England and Wales with company number 09681747 (we, us, or our).

    Where you are entering into these Terms with Aphex Australia Pty Ltd, the Australian Addendum at Attachment 1 (Australian Addendum) will apply. In the event of any conflict between these Terms and the Australian Addendum (when you are contracting with Aphex Australia Pty Ltd), the Australian Addendum will take precedence.

    These Terms form our contract with you, and set out our obligations as a service provider and your obligations as a customer. You cannot use our Services unless you agree to these Terms.

    Some capitalised words in these Terms have defined meanings, and each time that word is used in these Terms it has the same meaning. You can find a list of the defined words and their meaning at the end of these Terms or throughout these Terms.

    For questions about these Terms, or to get in touch with us, contact us using the details below:

    Disclaimer regarding the use of AI: The Services may involve the use of Artificial Intelligence (AI) (through OpenAI, Anthropic, and any other AI provider introduced by us from time to time). See clause 4 for further information on our use of AI.


    1. These Terms

    These Terms contain the terms and conditions on which we supply the Platform to you, whether the Platform comprises of services and/or digital content. Please read these Terms carefully before you accept these Terms by accessing the Platform.

    2. Engagement and Term

    2.1 These Terms apply from when you accept these Terms, until the date on which all of your Authorised User’s Accounts are terminated in accordance with these Terms. We grant you and each Authorised User a right to use our Services for this period of time only (which may be suspended or revoked in accordance with these Terms).

    2.2 You and each Authorised User must be at least 18 years old to use the Platform.

    2.3 Variations to these Terms: We may amend these Terms at any time, by providing written notice to you. By continuing to use our Platform after the notice or 30 days after notification (whichever date is earlier), you agree to the amended Terms. If you do not agree to the amendment, you may cancel your subscription with effect from the date of the change in these Terms by providing written notice to us. If you cancel your subscription, you and your Authorised Users will no longer be able to access our Services (including our Platform) on and from the date of cancellation, and we will close your Authorised Users’ Accounts.

    2.4 If you access or download our mobile application from (1) the Apple App Store, you agree to any Usage Rules set forth in the App Store Terms of Service or (2) the Google Play Store, you agree to the Android, Google Inc. Terms and Conditions including the Google Apps Terms of Service.

    2.5 We may use integrated APIs in our Services including ESRI and Mapbox. You may also integrate further APIs into the Platform. Your use of ESRI, Mapbox or any additional API may be subject to the terms of service of the relevant API provider. You acknowledge and agree that we have no control over and are not liable for the proper function of any third-party API integrated into the Platform.

    3. Our Services

    3.1 We provide the following services to you:

    (a) access to our Platform; and

    (b) access to our support services, as further particularised in our Support Policy (Support Services), (collectively, our Services).

    3.2 If you require Support Services, your Authorised Users may request these by getting in touch with us through our Platform.

    3.3 Unless we agree otherwise, Support Services cannot be used to support any other products or services, and does not include training, installation of software or hardware, software development or the modification, deletion or recovery of data or any on-site services.

    3.4 In consideration of your payment of the Fees, we will provide the Platform in accordance with these Terms and all applicable laws, whether ourselves or through our personnel. We warrant to you that the Platform will be provided using reasonable care and skill.

    3.5 We will not be responsible for any other services unless expressly set out in these Terms or on our Platform.

    3.6 Additional Services: If you require additional services, we may, in our sole discretion, provide such additional services (to be scoped and priced in a separate contract provided by us).

    3.7 Alpha, Preview, Beta or Experimental Services: If we provide you with access to any new, alpha, preview, beta or experimental services (Experimental Services), you acknowledge that because of the developmental nature of such services, you use them at your own risk and we have no obligation to maintain or provide error corrections. Any Experimental Services we provide you with access to are for evaluation purposes only and not for production use, and we may discontinue those services at any time at our sole discretion. We may, in our sole discretion, launch any Experimental Services as full features of our Platform, and may introduce fees in respect of such services. We agree to notify you of any such change by giving you 30 days’ notice in writing via the Platform (Notification). You may choose not to utilise the relevant functionality, in which event you will not be charged. Where you wish to continue using the Experimental Services after our Notification, the relevant fees will form part of the Fees and you must pay these to us in accordance with clause 9.

    3.8 Third Party Products or Services: Where you engage third parties to operate alongside our Services (for example, any third-party software systems you wish to integrate with our Platform), those third parties are independent of us and you are responsible for (meaning we will not be liable for) the goods or services they provide, unless we expressly agree otherwise.

    4. Artificial Intelligence

    4.1 Certain features of the Platform use artificial intelligence (AI) provided by third parties (including OpenAi, Anthropic, and others we may add from time to time). You can enable or disable AI features by opting into or out of specific features, and this can be managed at any time by your Admin Users.

    4.2 You acknowledge and agree that:

    (a) AI-generated content or outputs may not always be accurate or complete;

    (b) we do not guarantee the accuracy, reliability, suitability or completeness of any content or output generated by AI. We recommend that you thoroughly review any summaries or other output generated by AI before publishing such output; and

    (c) you are solely responsible for verifying the accuracy, reliability, suitability or completeness of any content or output generated by AI.

    4.3 Whilst we use our best commercial endeavours to limit any personal data sharing with our AI providers, we do not guarantee that any personal data input into the Platform will not be shared with our AI providers.

    4.4 You are solely responsible for any data you input into the Platform, including any personal data you input into the AI features of the Platform. If you do not want any of your information or personal data to be shared with our AI providers, you should not use the relevant AI features, or you should redact or not submit the relevant information or personal data.

    4.5 You agree not to submit any sensitive data via the Platform.

    4.6 Despite anything to the contrary, to the maximum extent permitted by law, we will not be liable for, and you waive and release us from and against, any Liability arising from or in connection with, any content or output generated by AI via the Platform.

    5. Authorised Users

    5.1 You may invite a number of users to the Platform, up to any limits specified in your chosen subscription, who will be permitted to access and use the Platform and join your Organisation (Authorised Users).

    5.2 You must ensure that each Authorised User complies with these Terms and our Acceptable Use Policy. You are responsible and liable for the acts or omissions of your Authorised Users, including where your Authorised User breaches these Terms and/or the Acceptable Use Policy.

    5.3 Your Authorised Users may register on the Platform and create an account using their email address and password (Account). Your Authorised Users may register for an Account using their Apple, Google or Microsoft account (Single Sign-On Account). If your Authorised Users sign in to their Account using a Single Sign-On Account, they authorise us to access information from their Single Sign-On Account including your name and contact information.

    5.4 Your Authorised Users are responsible for keeping their Account details confidential, and you will be liable for all activity on your Authorised Users’ Accounts, including any purchases made using their Account details. You agree to immediately notify us of any unauthorised use of an Account linked to your Organisation.

    5.5 We may suspend your or an Authorised User’s access to our Services where we reasonably believe there has been any unauthorised access or use of the Services (such as unauthorised sharing of login details for our Platform). If we suspend your access to the Services, we will let you know within a reasonable time of doing so, and we will work with you to resolve the matter, or if it cannot be resolved, then we may terminate your Account and your access to our Services will end.

    5.6 Your Authorised Users may delete their Account at any time via the Platform without affecting your Organisation or any other Authorised User. An Admin User may also request the deletion of any Authorised Users via the Platform.

    5.7 You may decide which of the features of the Platform each Authorised User will have access to via your Account. Each Authorised User which is given access to a particular feature will be considered to have a User Seat within the Platform.

    5.8 You may designate certain Authorised Users as Admin Users within the Platform. These Admin Users will have the ability to add or remove Authorised Users, change Authorised User permissions, and otherwise manage Accounts within your Organisation.

    6. Organisations

    6.1 Admin Users may create one or more Organisations within the Platform which your Authorised Users may join.

    6.2 Each Organisation will require a separate subscription, and may have separate Fees payable.

    6.3 You are responsible for all activity occurring within your Organisation, and for payment of any Fees associated with any Organisations established by your Authorised Users.

    6.4 You and your Admin Users are solely responsible for inviting or removing your Authorised Users from any Organisations which you control.

    6.5 You represent and warrant that your Admin Users are authorised to act on your behalf and create Organisations, and to bind you to any Fees that may be payable for additional Organisations.

    7. Changes to the Services requested by you:

    7.1 If you wish to change the Services (for example, by upgrading to a different tier of the Services), you must provide notice to us through your Account that you wish to vary the Services at least 5 Business Days before the next Payment Date. If you vary the Services and the Fees increase, we agree to provide you with access to the additional Services features immediately, and the increased Fees will apply on the next Payment Date.

    7.2 Where you downgrade your tier of Services (for example from Pro+ to Pro), all of Your Data and Output Data and any profile settings attached to your Account will save in your Account, however will only be accessible where your tier of the Services grant you access to the relevant feature.

    8. Minimum Term and Fees

    8.1 The Services may begin with a free version that has access to some Platform features. You acknowledge and agree that the free version of the Platform may not grant you access to all functionality within the Platform, and certain features may only be activated once you have any applicable Fees.

    8.2 The paid Services may begin with a free trial (Free Trial). The Free Trial will last for the period specified on the Platform (if applicable). We determine Free Trial eligibility in our sole discretion and we may limit eligibility to prevent Free Trial abuse. We reserve the right to revoke the Free Trial and suspend your Account at any time.

    8.3 If you do not pay the fees for the Services you have chosen (Fees) at the end of the Free Trial, you and your Authorised Users’ access to the Platform will finish at the end of the Free Trial. The date you make payment (Payment Date), the Services will start and the Free Trial will end.

    8.4 Unless the Services are suspended or terminated in accordance with these Terms, your access to the Services will roll over on an ongoing monthly or annual basis, and you will be charged the Fees on an ongoing monthly or annual basis from the Payment Date (as set out on the Platform). Without limiting your rights at law you can cancel the Services at any time in accordance with the “Cancellation” clause of these Terms (clause 16.1) and the cancellation will take effect from the next Payment Date falling after the 14 day notice period has ended.

    8.5 You will be billed based on the number of active User Seats within your Organisation at any time, as set out on the Platform. Where you choose a monthly subscription, the Fees for the upcoming month will be updated to reflect the highest number of active User Seats during the previous month. Where you choose an annual subscription, you prepay for a set number of active User Seats (Purchased Seats). If your actual number of active User Seats exceeds the Purchased Seats, we will invoice you an overage charge for any difference between the active User Seats and the Purchased Seats. You must pay the amount set out in our invoice in advance for the upcoming month.

    8.6 The payment methods we offer for the Fees are set out on the Platform. We may invoice you manually, or we may require you to provide us (or our payments processor) with your debit or credit card information, so that we may process your payment through our payment processor.

    8.7 You must not pay, or attempt to pay, the Fees by fraudulent or unlawful means. If you make a payment by debit card or credit card, you warrant that you are authorised to use the debit card or credit card to make the payment.

    8.8 You agree that we may set-off or deduct from any monies payable to you under these Terms, any amounts which are payable by you to us (whether under these Terms or otherwise). We do not store any credit card details, and all payment information is collected and stored through our third-party payment processor.

    8.9 To the extent permitted by law, the Fees are non-refundable and non-cancellable once paid. For the abundance of clarity, you will not be entitled to a refund of any portion of the Fees where you do not use all of your Purchased Seats during your annual subscription.

    8.10 We may need to change the Fees from time to time. If we change the Fees, we will provide you with 30 days’ notice of the change. After 30 days, we will apply the updated Fee to the Services. If the updated Fee is not acceptable to you, you may cancel the Services in accordance with the ‘Cancellation’ clause.

    8.11 If any payment has not been made in accordance with this clause 8, we may (at our absolute discretion):

    (a) after a period of 5 Business Days, cease providing the Services, remove your access to your Account, and recover, as a debt due and immediately payable from you, our additional costs of doing so (including reasonable legal fees, debt collector fees and mercantile agent fees); and/or

    (b) charge interest at a rate equal to 4% above the Bank of England’s base rate, from time to time, but at 4% a year for any period when that base rate is below 0%, per annum, calculated daily and compounding monthly, on any such amounts unpaid after the due date for payment in accordance with this clause 8.

    8.12 Taxes: You are responsible for paying any levies or taxes associated with your use of our Services, for example sales taxes, value-added taxes or withholding taxes (unless we are required by law to collect these on your behalf).

    9. Platform Licence

    9.1 While you have an active Organisation on the Platform, we grant you (and each Authorised User) a right to use our Platform (which may be suspended or revoked in accordance with these Terms). This right cannot be passed on or transferred to any other person, except as otherwise set out in these Terms.

    9.2 You agree to use the Platform in accordance with our Acceptable Use Policy, and you acknowledge and agree that the Acceptable Use Policy forms a part of this Agreement.

    9.3 You (and your Authorised Users) must not:

    (a) access or use our Platform in any way that is improper or breaches any laws, infringes any person's rights (for example, intellectual property rights and privacy rights), or gives rise to any civil or criminal liability;

    (b) interfere with or interrupt the supply of our Platform, or any other person’s access to or use of our Platform;

    (c) introduce any viruses or other malicious software code into our Platform;

    (d) use any unauthorised or modified version of our Platform, including but not limited to for the purpose of building similar or competitive software or for the purpose of obtaining unauthorised access to our Platform;

    (e) attempt to access any data or log into any server or account that you are not expressly authorised to access;

    (f) use our Platform in any way that involves service bureau use, outsourcing, renting, reselling, sublicensing, concurrent use of a single user login, or time-sharing;

    (g) circumvent user authentication or security of any of our networks, accounts or hosts or those of any third party; or

    (h) access or use our Platform to transmit, publish or communicate material that is, defamatory, offensive, abusive, indecent, menacing, harassing or unwanted.

    10. Availability, Disruption and Downtime

    10.1 We will use our best commercial endeavours to make the Platform available in accordance with our Service Level Agreement . The remedy set out in the Service Level Agreement will be your sole and exclusive remedy arising from our failure to meet any targets set out in the Service Level Agreement.

    10.2 From time to time, we may perform such reasonable scheduled and emergency maintenance and updates in relation to the Platform in order to continue to supply the Platform to you and our other customers (Scheduled or Emergency Maintenance). You agree that access to, or the functionality of all or part of the Platform, may need to be suspended for a period of time in order for us to perform the Scheduled or Emergency Maintenance, and to the maximum extent permitted by law, we will not be liable to you for any interruptions or downtime to the Platform as a result of any Scheduled or Emergency Maintenance.

    10.3 Our Services (including our Platform) may interact with, or be reliant on, products or services provided by third parties, such as cloud hosting service providers. To the maximum extent permitted by law, we are not liable for disruptions or downtime caused or contributed to by these third parties.

    10.4 We will try to provide you with reasonable notice, where possible, of any disruptions to your access to our Services. Where the Scheduled or Emergency Maintenance relates to scheduled downtime, we agree to provide you with at least 24 hours’ notice where possible. We agree to limit any scheduled maintenance to a maximum of 8 hours per calendar month.

    11. Intellectual Property and Data

    11.1 You acknowledge and agree that any Intellectual Property or content (including copyright, patents and trademarks) available on the Platform, the Platform itself (including how it looks and functions), any algorithms or machine learning models used on the Platform, as well as our copyrighted works, trademarks, inventions, designs and other intellectual property (Our Intellectual Property) will at all times vest, or remain vested, in us.

    11.2 We authorise you to use Our Intellectual Property solely for your limited commercial use. You must not exploit Our Intellectual Property for any other purpose, nor allow, aid or facilitate such use by any third party. Use must be limited to Authorised Users on devices that are controlled or approved by you.

    11.3 You must not, without our prior written consent:

    (a) copy, in whole or in part, any of Our Intellectual Property;

    (b) reproduce, retransmit, distribute, disseminate, sell, publish, broadcast or circulate any of Our Intellectual Property to any third party; or

    (c) breach any intellectual property rights connected with the Platform, including (without limitation) altering or modifying any of Our Intellectual Property, causing any of Our Intellectual Property to be framed or embedded in another website, or creating derivative works from any of Our Intellectual Property.

    11.4 Subject to the conditions below, you and your Authorised Users may share any reports generated via the Platform, including by exporting Your Data or the Output Data (as those terms are defined below), generating shareable links via the Platform, creating publishable versions of Your Data or the Output Data, or by using any of the other features we may make available on the Platform from time to time (Published Reports). When sharing any Published Reports, you (and your Authorised Users):

    (a) must not remove any identifying marks, including any of our trademarks or Our Intellectual Property contained within the Published Reports;

    (b) acknowledge and agree that where the Published Reports are generated via shareable links generated via the Platform, the information within these Published Reports can be accessed by anyone with the shareable link; and

    (c) acknowledge and agree that you are solely responsible for your use of the Published Reports, including for ensuring that the confidentiality of any Published Reports is maintained and that the Published Reports (including any shareable links generated via the Platform) are only shared with their intended audiences.

    Your Data

    11.5 You own all data, information, personal data, or content you and your Authorised Users upload into the Platform (Your Data), as well as any data or information output from the Platform using Your Data as input (Output Data). Note that Output Data does not include the Analytics (as described below).

    11.6 You grant us a limited licence to copy, transmit, store, backup and/or otherwise access or use Your Data and the Output Data to:

    (a) communicate with you;

    (b) supply the Platform to you and otherwise perform our obligations under these Terms;

    (c) diagnose problems with the Platform;

    (d) enhance and otherwise modify the Platform;

    (e) perform Analytics;

    (f) develop other services, provided we de-identify Your Data; and

    (g) as reasonably required to perform our obligations under these Terms.

    11.7 You agree that you are solely responsible for all of Your Data that you and your Authorised Users make available on or through the Platform. You represent and warrant that:

    (a) you are either the sole and exclusive owner of Your Data or you have all rights, licences, consents and releases that are necessary to grant to us the rights in Your Data (as contemplated by these Terms); and

    (b) neither Your Data nor the posting, uploading, publication, submission or transmission of Your Data or our use of Your Data on, through or by means of our Platform will infringe, misappropriate or violate a third party’s intellectual property rights, or rights of publicity or privacy, or result in the violation of any applicable law or regulation.

    11.8 You acknowledge and agree that we may monitor, analyse and compile statistical and performance information based on and/or related to your use of the Platform, in an aggregated and anonymised format (Analytics). You acknowledge and agree that we own all rights in the Analytics, and that we may use the Analytics for our own business purposes, provided that the Analytics do not contain any identifying information.

    11.9 We do not endorse or approve, and are not responsible for, any of Your Data.

    11.10 You are responsible for (meaning we are not liable for) the integrity of Your Data on your systems, networks or any device controlled by you.

    11.11 You acknowledge and agree that the Platform and the integrity and accuracy of the Output Data is reliant on the accuracy and completeness of Your Data, and the provision by you of Your Data that is inaccurate or incomplete may affect the use, output and operation of the Platform.

    11.12 This clause will survive the termination or expiry of these Terms.

    12. Your Warranties

    12.1 You represent, warrant and agree that:

    (a) you and your Authorised Users will not use our Platform, including Our Intellectual Property, in any way that competes with our business;

    (b) there are no legal restrictions preventing you from entering into these Terms;

    (c) all information and documentation that you provide to us in connection with these Terms is true, correct and complete;

    (d) you are responsible for ensuring your Systems and data are appropriately backed up and up to date before we perform any Services that may affect them;

    (e) you are solely responsible for notifying the relevant parties (including your Authorised Users) of any planned outages or downtime necessary for the performance of the Services; and

    (f) you have not relied on any representations or warranties made by us in relation to the Platform (including as to whether the Platform is or will be fit or suitable for your particular purposes), unless expressly stipulated in these Terms;

    (g) any of your Admin Users have authority to bind you to any terms or Fees; and

    (h) you must immediately notify us if any of your Admin Users no longer have authority to bind you.

    13. Limitations on and Exclusions to our Liability

    13.1 Nothing in these Terms limits any Liability which cannot legally be limited, including Liability for:

    (a) death or personal injury caused by negligence; and

    (b) fraud or fraudulent misrepresentation.

    13.2 To the maximum extent permitted by law, we will not be liable for, and you waive and release us from and against any Liability arising from or in connection with:

    (a) any Third Party Products or Services, or any unavailability of the Platform due to a failure of the Third Party Products or Services;

    (b) any unauthorised access to or use of your Published Reports or any data contained within them;

    (c) any instructions or requests provided by you or your Personnel to us;

    (d) Your Data;

    (e) Any content generated by AI via the Platform; and

    (f) any results obtained from, or recommendations made by, the Services.

    13.3 Subject to clause 13.1 (liability which cannot legally be limited), but despite anything to the contrary, to the maximum extent permitted by law:

    (a) you agree to indemnify us for any Liability we incur due to your breach of the Platform Licence clause (clause 9) and the Intellectual Property clause (clause 13) of these Terms;

    (b) neither Party will be liable for any Consequential Loss;

    (c) a party’s liability for any liability under these Terms will be reduced proportionately to the extent the relevant liability was caused or contributed to by the acts or omissions of the other party, including any failure by that other party to mitigate its loss; and

    (d) our aggregate liability for any liability arising from or in connection with these Terms will be limited to (i) the total subscription Fees paid or payable for the Services during the 12 months immediately preceding the date on which the claim arose or (ii) in the event that no subscription Fees are paid or payable in respect of such period, our total aggregate liability will be limited to £100.

    13.4 We have given commitments as to the compliance of the Platform with these Terms and applicable Laws in clause 3.5. In view of these commitments, the terms implied by sections 3, 4 and 5 of the Supply of Goods and Services Act 1982 are, to the maximum extent permitted by law, excluded from these Terms.

    13.5 This clause will survive the termination or expiry of these Terms.

    14. Termination

    14.1 Cancellation: You or your Admin Users may request to cancel the Services at any time by providing us a minimum of 14 days written notice via the Platform. Your cancellation will take effect from the next Payment Date falling after the 14 day notice period has ended.

    14.2 We may terminate these Terms (meaning you will lose access to our Services, including access to your Account) if:

    (a) you do not pay the Fees as they fall due;

    (b) you or your Authorised Users breach these Terms and do not remedy that breach within 14 days of us notifying you of that breach;

    (c) you or your Authorised Users breach these Terms and that breach cannot be remedied; or

    (d) you experience an insolvency event (including but not limited to bankruptcy, receivership, voluntary administration, liquidation, or entering into creditors’ schemes of arrangement).

    14.3 Should we suspect that you are in breach of these Terms, we may suspend your access to the Platform while we investigate the suspected breach.

    14.4 Upon expiry or termination of the Services, we will retain Your Data (including copies) as required by law or regulatory requirements (and where we have entered into a data processing agreement with you, in accordance with the data processing agreement).

    14.5 Where termination is due to our breach of these Terms, we agree to refund you for any prepaid unused Fees on a pro-rata basis.

    14.6 Termination of the Services will not affect any rights or liabilities that a Party has accrued under these Terms.

    14.7 This clause will survive the termination or expiry of these Terms.

    15. Notice Regarding Apple

    15.1 To the extent that you or your Authorised Users are using or accessing our Platform on an iOS device, you further acknowledge and agree to the terms of this clause. You acknowledge that these Terms are between you and us only, not with Apple Inc. (Apple), and Apple is not responsible for the Platform and any content available on the Platform.

    15.2 Apple has no obligation to furnish you or your Authorised Users with any maintenance and support services with respect to our Platform.

    15.3 If our mobile application fails to conform to any applicable warranty, you may notify Apple and Apple will refund the purchase price of the mobile application to you (where applicable). To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Apple will have no other warranty obligation whatsoever with respect to the mobile application and any other claims, losses, liabilities, damages, costs or expenses attributable to any failure to conform to any warranty will be our responsibility.

    15.4 Apple is not responsible for addressing any claims by you or any third party (including your Authorised Users) relating to our mobile application or your use of our mobile application, including but not limited to: (1) product liability claims; (2) any claim that our mobile application fails to conform to any applicable legal or regulatory requirement; and (3) claims arising under consumer protection or similar legislation.

    15.5 Apple is not responsible for the investigation, defence, settlement and discharge of any third-party claim that our mobile application infringes that third party’s intellectual property rights.

    15.6 You agree to comply with any applicable third-party terms when using our mobile application.

    15.7 Apple and Apple subsidiaries are third-party beneficiaries of these Terms, and upon your acceptance of these Terms, Apple will have the right (and will be deemed to have accepted the right) to enforce these Terms against you as a third-party beneficiary of these Terms.

    15.8 You hereby represent and warrant that: (1) you are not located in a country that is subject to a U.S. Government embargo, or that has been designated by the U.S. Government as a "terrorist supporting" country; and (2) you are not listed on any U.S. Government list of prohibited or restricted parties.

    16. General

    16.1 Assignment: Subject to the below clause, a Party must not assign or deal with the whole or any part of its rights or obligations under these Terms without the prior written consent of the other Party (such consent is not to be unreasonably withheld).

    16.2 Assignment of Debt: You agree that we may assign or transfer any debt owed by you to us, arising under or in connection with these Terms, to a debt collector, debt collection agency, or other third party.

    16.3 Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999: Notwithstanding any other provision of these Terms, nothing in these Terms confers or is intended to confer any right to enforce any of its terms on any person who is not a party to it.

    16.4 Disputes: Neither we or you may commence court proceedings relating to any dispute, controversy or claim arising from, or in connection with, these Terms (including any question regarding its existence, validity or termination) (Dispute) unless we and you first meet (in good faith) to resolve the Dispute. Nothing in this clause will operate to prevent us or you from seeking urgent injunctive or equitable relief from a court of appropriate jurisdiction.

    If the Dispute is not resolved at that initial meeting:

    (a) where you are resident or incorporated in England and Wales, refer the matter to mediation, administered by The Centre for Effective Dispute Resolution; or

    (b) where you are not resident or incorporated in England and Wales, refer the matter to arbitration administered by the London Court of International Arbitration (LCIA), with such arbitration to be conducted in London, before one arbitrator, in English and in accordance with the LCIA Arbitration Rules.

    16.5 Force Majeure: To the maximum extent permitted by law, we shall have no Liability for any event or circumstance outside of our reasonable control.

    16.6 Marketing: You agree that we may send you electronic communications about our products and services. You may opt-out at any time by using the unsubscribe function in our electronic communications

    16.7 Governing law: These Terms are governed by the laws of England and Wales. Each Party irrevocably and unconditionally submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts operating in England and Wales and any courts entitled to hear appeals from those courts and waives any right to object to proceedings being brought in those courts. The Platform may be accessed in the UK and overseas. We make no representation that the Platform complies with the laws (including intellectual property laws) of any country outside of the UK. If you access the Platform from outside the UK, you do so at your own risk and are responsible for complying with the laws in the place you access the Platform. The United Nations Convention of Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded from these Terms.

    16.8 Notices: Any notice given under these Terms must be in writing addressed to us at the details set out below or to you at the details provided in your Account. Any notice may be sent by standard post or email, and will be deemed to have been served on the expiry of 48 hours in the case of post, or at the time of transmission in the case of transmission by email.

    16.9 Publicity: You agree that we may advertise or publicise the fact you are a customer of ours, for example on our website or in our promotional material, and you grant us a right to display and use your logo and branding solely for that purpose. We agree to seek your prior written consent before publishing any specific project details.

    16.10 Privacy: All personal data you and your Authorised Users provide to us will be treated in accordance with Applicable Data Protection Law and in accordance with our Privacy Policy, . You agree to comply with all Applicable Data Protection Laws. To the extent that we act as the Processor of any Personal Data of which you are the Controller (as these terms are defined in the Data Protection Act 2018), the Parties each agree to comply with the terms of our Data Processing Agreement, which is available on our and forms part of these Terms.

    16.11 Severance: If a provision of these Terms is held to be void, invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that provision is to be read down as narrowly as necessary to allow it to be valid or enforceable, failing which, that provision (or that part of that provision) will be severed from these Terms without affecting the validity or enforceability of the remainder of that provision or the other provisions in these Terms.

    16.12 Third party sites: The Platform may contain links to websites operated by third parties. Unless we tell you otherwise, we do not control, endorse or approve, and are not responsible for, the content on those websites. We recommend that you make your own investigations with respect to the suitability of those websites. If you purchase goods or services from a third party website linked from the Platform, such third party provides the goods and services to you, not us. We may receive a benefit (which may include a referral fee or a commission) should you visit certain third-party websites via a link on the Platform (Affiliate Link) or for featuring certain products or services on the Platform. We will make it clear by notice to you which (if any) products or services we receive a benefit to feature on the Platform, or which (if any) third party links are Affiliate Links.

    16.13 Entire agreement: These Terms contain the entire understanding between the Parties and the Parties agree that no representation or statement has been made to, or relied upon by, either of the Parties, except as expressly stipulated in these Terms, and these Terms supersede all previous discussions, communications, negotiations, understandings, representations, warranties, commitments and agreements, in respect of its subject matter. You acknowledge and agree that these Terms will take precedence over any terms and conditions you subsequently provide to us in respect of the Platform, including any terms and conditions contained within a purchase order provided by you to us.

    17. Definitions

    Acceptable Use Policy means our acceptable use policy,

    Account has the meaning given in clause 5.3.

    Admin Users means your Authorised Users who are granted administrative rights, as set out in the Platform.

    AI has the meaning given in clause 4.1.

    Applicable Data Protection Law means the laws and regulations applicable to the processing of Personal Data by the Parties in connection with the Terms, including the Data Protection Act 2018 and Privacy Act 1988 (Cth).

    Authorised Users has the meaning given in clause 5.1.

    Consequential Loss includes any consequential loss, indirect loss, real or anticipated loss of profit, loss of benefit, loss of revenue, loss of business, loss of goodwill, loss of opportunity, loss of savings, loss of reputation, loss of use and/or loss or corruption of data, whether under statute, contract, equity, tort (including negligence), indemnity or otherwise.

    Experimental Services has the meaning given in clause 3.7.

    Fees has the meaning given in clause 8.3.

    Intellectual Property means any copyright, registered or unregistered designs, patents or trade marks, business names, get-up, goodwill, domain names, know-how, inventions, processes, trade secrets or confidential information, circuit layouts, software, computer programs, databases or source codes, including any application for registration of, and any improvements, enhancements or modifications of, the foregoing, and any right to apply for and be granted, renewals or extensions of, and rights to claim priority from, such rights and all similar or equivalent rights or forms of protection which subsist or will subsist now or in the future, including in respect of the foregoing.

    Liability means any expense, cost, liability, loss, damage, claim, notice, entitlement, investigation, demand, proceeding or judgment (whether under statute, contract, equity, tort (including negligence), misrepresentation, restitution, indemnity or otherwise), howsoever arising, whether direct or indirect and/or whether present, unascertained, future or contingent and whether involving a third party or a party to these Terms or otherwise.

    Organisation means an environment within the Platform where Authorised Users may manage construction projects, including to submit, post or modify Your Data.

    Our Intellectual Property has the meaning given in clause 11.1.

    Output Data has the meaning given in clause 11.5.

    Payment Date has the meaning given in clause 8.3.

    Platform has the meaning given at the beginning of these Terms.

    Published Reports has the meaning given in clause 11.4.

    Purchased Seats has the meaning given in clause 8.5.

    Scheduled or Emergency Maintenance has the meaning given in clause 10.2.

    Services has the meaning given in clause 3.1.

    System means all hardware, software, networks, telecommunications and other IT systems used by a Party from time to time, including a network.

    Your Data has the meaning given in clause 11.5.


    ATTACHMENT 1 – AUSTRALIAN ADDENDUM

    Where you are contracting with Aphex Australia Pty Ltd (ABN 13 628 119 648), the following provisions will apply in addition to the above Terms:

    Definitions

    1. Interest on late payments: Clause 8.11(b) is omitted and replaced with: “charge interest on any overdue payments at a rate equal to the Reserve Bank of Australia’s cash rate, from time-to-time, plus 2% per annum, calculated daily and compounding monthly”.

    2. Consumer Law Rights:

    2.1 In some jurisdictions, you may have guarantees, rights or other remedies provided by law (Consumer Law Rights), and these Terms do not restrict your Consumer Law Rights. We will only be bound by your Consumer Law Rights and the express wording of these Terms.

    2.2 Subject to your Consumer Law Rights, we do not provide a refund for a change of mind or change in circumstance.

    2.3 If you accept these Terms in Australia, nothing in these Terms should be interpreted to exclude, restrict or modify the application of, or any rights or remedies you may have under, any part of the Australian Consumer Law (as set out in Schedule 2 of the Competition and Consumer Act 2010 (Cth)). If our Platform is not ordinarily used for personal, household or domestic use, our liability for a breach of your Consumer Law Rights is limited to either resupplying our Services, or paying the cost of having our Services resupplied.

    3. Liability:

    3.1 Clause 13 is omitted and replaced with the following:

    “To the maximum extent permitted by law, we will not be liable for, and you release us from liability for, any Liability caused or contributed to by, arising from or in connection with:

    (a) your computing environment (for example, your hardware, software, information technology and telecommunications services and systems); or

    (b) any use of our Services by a person or entity other than you or your Authorised Users.

    Regardless of whatever else is stated in these Terms, to the maximum extent permitted by law:

    (a) neither we or you are liable for any Consequential Loss;

    (b) a party’s liability for any Liability under these Terms will be reduced proportionately to the extent the relevant Liability was caused or contributed to by the actions (or inactions) of the other party, including any failure by the other party to mitigate its loss;

    (c) (where our Services are not ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption) in respect of any failure by us to comply with relevant Consumer Law Rights, our Liability is limited (at our discretion) to supplying the Services again or paying the cost of having the Services supplied again; and

    (d) our aggregate liability to you for any Liability arising from or in connection with these Terms will be limited to the amount of any Fees paid by you to us in respect of the supply of the relevant Services to which the Liability relates, or if you do not have a subscription, to AU$100.“

    4. Disputes:

    4.1 Clause 16.4 is omitted and replaced with the following:

    17.1 “Neither we or you may commence court proceedings relating to any dispute, controversy or claim arising from, or in connection with, these Terms (including any question regarding its existence, validity or termination) (Dispute) unless we and you first meet (in good faith) to resolve the Dispute. Nothing in this clause will operate to prevent us or you from seeking urgent injunctive or equitable relief from a court of appropriate jurisdiction.

    17.2 If the Dispute is not resolved at that initial meeting:

    (a) where you are resident or incorporated in Australia, refer the matter to mediation, administered by the Australian Disputes Centre in accordance with Australian Disputes Centre Guidelines for Commercial Mediation; or

    (b) where you are not resident or incorporated in Australia, refer the matter to arbitration administered by the Australian Centre for International Commercial Arbitration, with such arbitration to be conducted in Brisbane, Queensland, Queensland, before one arbitrator, in English and in accordance with the ACICA Arbitration Rules.”

    5. Governing law:

    Clause 16.7 is omitted and replaced with the following:

    “These Terms are governed by the laws of Queensland, and any matter relating to these Terms is to be determined exclusively by the courts in Queensland and any courts entitled to hear appeals from those courts.”

    Definitions

    Consequential Loss includes any consequential loss, special or indirect loss, real or anticipated loss of profit, loss of benefit, loss of revenue, loss of business, loss of goodwill, loss of opportunity, loss of savings, loss of reputation, loss of use and/or loss or corruption of data, whether under statute, contract, equity, tort (including negligence), indemnity or otherwise. However, your obligation to pay us any amounts for access to or use of our Services (including our Platform) will not constitute “Consequential Loss”.

    Our contact details:

    UK entity

    Aphex Software Limited, a company established in England and Wales. Our company registration number is 09681747.

    Geographical address: 82 Wandsworth Bridge Road, London, SW6 2TF

    Email address: [email protected]

    Australian entity

    Aphex Australia Pty Ltd (ABN 13 628 119 648).

    Geographical address: 2/28 Metroplex Avenue, Murrarrie, 4172

    Email address: [email protected]

    (available here)
    (available here)
    available here
    website here
    set out here.

    How the Project Reporting Suite works

    Here at Aphex, we aim to keep things simple! That’s why we’ve created a set of pre-designed Power BI reports that allow you to pull data and insights directly from your project.

    A key advantage of these templates is that they exclusively pull from your published versions, ensuring you always have the most accurate and up-to-date information at your fingertips.

    This feature enables confident, data-driven decision-making. Each template is fully customisable to suit your unique project needs, but you can also use them as-is for immediate reporting.

    PPC Dashboard (Task Day)


    This report provides a snapshot of your project's progress against its plan, tracking key metrics such as PPC (Percent Plan Complete) and identifying recorded delays within your publications.

    Key Measures:

    Leading Measure (PPC)

    Leading Measure: You can choose your preferred method for measuring PPC (Percent Plan Complete) which helps in understanding how well your project is performing against the plan:

    • PPC (Task Day): Calculates the overall average percentage of task completion by evaluating the PPC of each task. The PPC of a task represents the percentage of planned workdays that were completed between two publication dates (such as from last week to now).

    • PPC (Task):

    Latest Publication

    Latest Publication: Shows the date of the most recent publication in your dataset.

    Current PPC

    Current PPC: Displays the current PPC based on tasks completed between the two most recent publications selected.

    Tasks Progressed

    Tasks Progressed: Calculates the number of unique tasks that have made progress (i.e., have recorded workdays) during the specified reference window, which is the period between two publication dates (e.g., from last week to now). It only considers the most recent version of each task. If no progress is recorded, it returns 0.

    Unplanned Tasks

    Unplanned Tasks: Calculates the number of unique tasks that have made progress (i.e., recorded workdays) but were not included in the planned work during the specified reference window (the period between two publication dates, such as from last week to now). It only considers the most recent version of each task. If no unplanned progress is recorded, it returns

    Primary Source of Delay

    Primary Source of Delay: Identifies the main reason for delays based on the amount of status logged for different reasons. It filters data by positive statuses, narrows it down to relevant owners, and returns the most significant delay reason within the reference window.

    Filters

    A number of filters can be applied to the report. By default, all filters are set to show all data:

    • Publications Included: Displays all publications in your dataset (up to five) by default, with options to select specific ones for analysis.

    • Task Owners: Displays all Task Owners with tasks in the selected publications

    Overall PPC Trend

    Overall PPC Trend: Breaks down the PPC on specific publication dates within the dataset and provides a rolling average (over four weeks). Hovering over the values reveals information about the included published versions (PPC, Tasks Progressed, and Unplanned Tasks).

    Performance Breakdown - Users/Subcontractors/Packages

    Performance Breakdown - Users/Subcontractors/Packages: Compares the PPC of Owners, Subcontractors and Packages within the specified timeframe and over the past four weeks (rolling average). Owners are users assigned as task owners during the specified timeframe, while Subcontractors and Packages are assigned to tasks within the same timeframe.

    Delay Breakdown

    Delay Breakdown: Details the reasons for delays associated with tasks in the specific time window and shows the individual reasons for delays along with their total impact (in days) for each reason.

    Available In:

    See Also:

    PPC Dashboard (Task)


    This report provides a comprehensive overview of your project's performance, including weekly and cumulative Percent Plan Complete (PPC) scores, reasons for non-completion (RNC), and detailed task status breakdowns.

    Key Measures:

    Leading Measure (PPC)

    Leading Measure: You can choose your preferred method for measuring PPC (Percent Plan Complete) which helps in understanding how well your project is performing against the plan:

    • PPC (Task Day): Calculates the overall average percentage of task completion by evaluating the PPC of each task. The PPC of a task represents the percentage of planned workdays that were completed between two publication dates (such as from last week to now).

    Summary
    • Latest Publication: Shows the date of the most recent publication in your dataset.

    • Planned: Counts the number of individual tasks scheduled to occur within the specified time window.

    Filters

    A number of filters can be applied to the report. By default, all filters are set to show all data:

    • Publications Included: Displays all publications in your dataset (up to five) by default, with options to select specific ones for analysis.

    • Task Owners: Displays all Task Owners with tasks in the selected publications

    Planned Percentage Complete by Week

    Planned Percentage Complete by Week: Breaks down the PPC on specific publication dates within the dataset and provides a rolling average (over four weeks). Hovering over the values reveals information about the included published versions (PPC, Tasks Progressed, and Unplanned Tasks).

    Current PPC

    Current PPC: Displays the current PPC based on tasks completed between the two most recent publications selected, according to the PPC calculation method chosen by the user.

    Failed Tasks

    Failed Tasks: Counts the number of tasks where the end date has been deferred to the following week.

    Reason for Non-Completion (RNC)

    Reason for Non-Completion (RNC): Calculates the delay reasons for tasks within the selected range of publications.

    Reason for Non-Completion (RNC) - Past 10 Weeks

    Reason for Non-Completion (RNC) - Past 10 Weeks: Aggregates the total delay reasons for tasks that have been delayed over the past ten weeks.

    Available In:

    See Also:

    Task Explorer


    This report offers an in-depth analysis of your project's weekly progress, highlighting task statuses and providing insights into reasons for non-completion. With detailed visualisations, you can effectively track performance and identify areas for improvement.

    Leading Measure (PPC)

    Leading Measure: You can choose your preferred method for measuring PPC (Percent Plan Complete) which helps in understanding how well your project is performing against the plan:

    • PPC (Task Day): Calculates the overall average percentage of task completion by evaluating the PPC of each task. The PPC of a task represents the percentage of planned workdays that were completed between two publication dates (such as from last week to now).

    Filters

    A number of filters can be applied to the report. By default, all filters are set to show all data:

    • Publications Included: Displays all publications in your dataset (up to five) by default, with options to select specific ones for analysis.

    • Task Owners: Displays all Task Owners with tasks in the selected publications

    Summary
    • Latest Publication: Shows the date of the most recent publication in your dataset.

    • Planned: Counts the number of individual tasks scheduled to occur within the specified time window.

    Task ID

    Task ID: Retrieves the activity ID of the task within Aphex.

    Task Name

    Task Name: Displays the latest task name based on task versions.

    External ID

    External ID: Finds the most recent external ID associated with the task.

    Task Start/End:

    Task Start/End: Retrieves the latest start and end dates for tasks.

    Reason For Non-Completion

    Reason For Non-Completion: Identifies the most recent reason for task delays within the current window. This includes all possible reasons for delays, ensuring comprehensive analysis of task status.

    Available In:

    Publication Summary


    This report monitors the completion and quality of your weekly publications, tracking user involvement and identifying potential issues such as clashes or missing information. With clear visualisations, you can easily assess the status of each publication and address any concerns that may arise.

    Key Measures:

    Filters
    • Publications Included: By default, this report includes all publications within your dataset (up to a maximum of five). You have the option to select specific publications for your analysis.

    • Task Owners: By default, this report includes all task owners within your dataset. You have the option to select specific Task Owners for your analysis.

    Publication Summary

    Publication Summary: This section categorises each publication as "Not Ready" or "Reviewed" at the time of publication and displays user counts. Clicking on an individual bar will highlight detailed data within the Publication Breakdown.

    Publication Breakdown

    Publication Breakdown: Provides a comprehensive overview of each publication, detailing the status, clashes, missing fields, and blockers associated with each user and publication date. By clicking on an individual publication, you can focus on the corresponding data within the Publication Summary.

    Available In:

    See Also:

    Plan Comparison


    The Plan Comparison report provides a comprehensive analysis of plan and milestone variances, enabling you to compare the overall plan or specific milestones effectively. By highlighting changes between any two points in time, this report helps you to make informed decisions based on real-time data insights.

    Key Measures:

    Filters
    • Primary Publication Selector: This allows you to choose the publication for analysis, with the default set to the latest publication. You can also select from Latest, Prior, or Rest options to customise your comparison.

    • Comparison Publication Selector: The default for this selector is set to Rest, but you can adjust it to Latest, Prior, or Rest, enabling a tailored view of your comparison data.

    New Tasks

    New Tasks: The count of new tasks created per day between publications

    Comparison Publication

    Comparison Publication: This count reflects the number of tasks present in the comparison publication that have their end dates before or on the last task date from either the primary or comparison publication, providing insight into scheduling overlaps.

    Primary Publication

    Primary Publication: This measure counts the number of tasks in the primary publication, based on specific conditions such as end dates and associations with both the primary and comparison publications, facilitating detailed analysis.

    Milestones

    Milestones: This section displays all upcoming milestones, highlighting the most recent end date. It also compares the end dates of milestones between the primary and comparison publications, illustrating the difference in days between the two to track progress effectively.

    Available In:

    Milestone Comparison


    The Milestone Comparison report provides a focused analysis of milestone date changes across your publication history, enabling you to track schedule progression and identify trends in milestone movement over time. By comparing milestone end dates between publications and visualising variance trends, this report helps you understand schedule stability, anticipate potential delays, and communicate milestone changes effectively.

    Key Measures:

    Filters
    • Selected publication: You can select only one Published Version at a time, with the default setting being the latest Publication Version, referred to as the Selected Publication. Options include Latest, Prior, or Rest for customised analysis.

    • Milestones Ending In: By default, the dashboard focuses on the next month, but you can adjust the timeframe to include options like Last, Next, This, Days, Weeks, Months, and Years for a more specific analysis.

    WBSName (Work Breakdown Structure)

    WBSName: Filter to view tasks within a specific WBS (Folder). By default, all tasks will be displayed.

    Name (Task)

    Name: The name of the Milestone.

    Dates (Current/Prior)
    • Current Date: The end date of the milestone in the selected publication.

    • Prior Date: The end date of the milestone in the publication prior to the selected publication.

    Trend Over Time

    Trend Over Time: Displays an in-line bar chart showing a trend in milestone variance over the publications available in your dataset (maximum 5).

    Available In:

    Daily Task Allocation


    The Daily Task Allocation report provides a detailed view of task distribution across your team, enabling you to compare planned versus actual work execution on a daily basis. By analysing task allocation between any two publications, this report helps you identify workload patterns, capacity constraints, and deviations from your original plan, supporting more accurate resource planning and scheduling decisions.

    Key Measures:

    Filters
    • Publications Included: By default, this includes all publications within your dataset (up to a maximum of five). You have the flexibility to select specific publications to include in your analysis. The latest two selected publications are used for comparison.

    • Date Range Included: By default, the dashboard focuses on the next month, but you can adjust the timeframe to include options like Last, Next, This, Days, Weeks, Months, and Years for a more specific analysis.

    Daily Task Allocation by Owner
    • Date: Shows dates in the selected range

    • Owner: The owner of the task. Alternatively, this can be set to Subcontractor or Package

    Planned vs Actual Tasks per Day by Owner

    Over-time bar chart showing:

    • Count of Tasks Planned on Given Date: The number of tasks planned to be worked on per day from the prior selected publication

    • Count of Tasks on Given Date: The number of tasks that happened per day in the latest selected publication

    Available In:

    Blockers Dashboard


    The Blockers Dashboard provides a comprehensive overview of key details regarding blockers (issues or obstacles) that may impact your project. By tracking and analysing these blockers, you can identify potential risks and implement strategies to mitigate them effectively.

    Key Measures:

    Summary
    • Open Blockers (4 Weeks): This metric counts the number of open blockers that are due within the next four weeks, providing insight into immediate concerns.

    • Overdue Blockers: This measure calculates the total number of overdue blockers in the selected publication, helping you identify tasks that need urgent attention.

    Filters
    • Selected Publication: You can select only one Published Version at a time, with the default setting being the latest Publication Version, referred to as the Selected Publication. Options include Latest, Prior, or Rest for customised analysis.

    • Open Blockers Date Range: Adjusting the date range in this section influences the graph when the status is set to Open. It affects the task results in the Open tab of the table on the right, focusing on open blockers with due dates within the specified timeframe. Note that open blockers without due dates will not be included in the graph.

    Category

    Category: The graph displays how many blockers there are in each category within the selected Publications Included, with their names listed above the bars for easy identification. Hovering over each category bar will show the category name, the individual blockers assigned to that category, and the total number of blockers in that category.

    All Overdue & Open
    • All Overdue: The All Overdue tab lists all tasks associated with overdue blockers within the selected published version, providing a comprehensive view of outstanding issues.

    • Open: The Open tab displays all tasks linked to open blockers, filtered by those whose due dates fall within the specified date range set in the Open Blockers Date Range control.

    Available In:


    Material Resource


    The Material Resource offers valuable insights into how effectively material resources are planned and utilised across your project. By comparing planned quantities against actual usage, this report helps you identify trends and discrepancies, ensuring you have a comprehensive understanding of your material distribution.

    Key Measures:

    Filters
    • Selected Publication: You can select only one Published Version at a time, with the default setting being the latest Publication Version, referred to as the Selected Publication. Options include Latest, Prior, or Rest for customised analysis.

    • Date Range Included: By default, the dashboard focuses on the next month, but you can adjust the timeframe to include options like Last, Next, This, Days, Weeks, Months, and Years for a more specific analysis.

    Material Demand

    Material Demand: This metric sums the total planned quantities of materials for tasks recorded within your selected publication and date range. Each material type is visually represented with its own bar colour on the graph, making it easy to analyse trends at a glance.

    Summary

    Summary: The summary section provides a detailed breakdown of the materials included in the selected primary publication. It showcases both the total planned quantity of materials and the actual quantity logged, giving you a clear picture of resource utilisation.

    Tasks

    Tasks: The tasks section provides a detailed breakdown of the materials included in the selected primary publication. It showcases both the total planned quantity of materials and the actual quantity logged, giving you a clear picture of resource utilisation.

    Progress Percentage

    Progress Percentage: This calculates the percentage of actual materials used compared to the planned materials in the selected primary publication. It offers a straightforward percentage score to assess how closely actual usage aligns with your plans, enabling informed decision-making for future resource allocation.

    Available In:

    Labour and Plant Resource


    The Labour and Plant Resource delivers clear visualisations and precise forecast allocations, enabling you to effectively analyse how Labour and Plant resources are planned across your projects. With this dashboard, you can easily identify trends and make informed decisions regarding resource allocation.

    Key Measures:

    Filters
    • Selected Publication: You can select only one Published Version at a time, with the default setting being the latest Publication Version, referred to as the Selected Publication. Options include Latest, Prior, or Rest for customised analysis

    • Resource Types: The Resource Types selector allows you to choose which Labour and Plant resources to display. By default, all resources are included, giving you a comprehensive overview

    Labour & Plant Demand

    Labour & Plant Demand: This metric calculates the total planned Labour and Plant resources recorded within your selected publication and date range. Each resource type is visually represented with its own bar colour on the graph, making it easy to interpret data at a glance

    Date Range Included

    Date Range Included: By default, the dashboard focuses on the next month, but you can adjust the timeframe to include options like Last, Next, This, Days, Weeks, Months, and Years for a more specific analysis.

    Date

    Date: The Date section displays the specific date when the resource was included in the Planner. This information updates dynamically based on your selection in the Date Range Selector

    Resource

    Resource: This field indicates the title of the Labour or Plant resource in the Planner. It also updates according to your selection in the Date Range Selector, ensuring you have the most relevant information at hand.

    Amount

    Amount: The Amount metric calculates the sum of the planned quantities for resources associated with tasks in the primary publication. This value will update in real-time as you adjust your selections in the Date Range Selector, providing ongoing insights into resource planning.

    Available In:

    Calculates the efficiency of task completion in a project by comparing the number of tasks completed to the number of tasks planned between two publication dates (such as from last week to now).

    Packages: Displays all Package Names with tasks in the selected publications

  • Subcontractors: Displays all Subcontractors with tasks in the selected publications

  • Folder Code: Displays nested folder codes for the purpose of filtering to a specific branch of the folder tree.

  • PPC (Task):
    Calculates the efficiency of task completion in a project by comparing the number of tasks completed to the number of tasks planned between two publication dates (such as from last week to now).
    On Track: Counts the number of tasks that are currently ongoing or have been completed within the specified time window.
  • Delayed: Counts the number of tasks that have been delayed (pushed out) within the specified time window.

  • Unplanned: Counts tasks that were not scheduled to start within the earlier selected publication but are now included in the most recent selected publication.

  • Brought Forward: Counts tasks that have been advanced beyond the latest publication selected.

  • Deleted: Counts tasks that existed in previous publications but have been removed from the most recent selected publication.

  • Packages: Displays all Package Names with tasks in the selected publications

    • Subcontractors: Displays all Subcontractors with tasks in the selected publications

    • Folder Code: Displays nested folder codes for the purpose of filtering to a specific branch of the folder tree.

    PPC (Task):
    Calculates the efficiency of task completion in a project by comparing the number of tasks completed to the number of tasks planned between two publication dates (such as from last week to now).
  • Packages: Displays all Package Names with tasks in the selected publications

    • Subcontractors: Displays all Subcontractors with tasks in the selected publications

    • Folder Code: Displays nested folder codes for the purpose of filtering to a specific branch of the folder tree.

    On Track: Counts the number of tasks that are currently ongoing or have been completed within the specified time window.

    • Delayed: Counts the number of tasks that have been delayed (pushed out) within the specified time window.

    • Unplanned: Counts tasks that were not scheduled to start within the earlier selected publication but are now included in the most recent selected publication.

    • Brought Forward: Counts tasks that have been advanced beyond the latest publication selected.

    • Deleted: Counts tasks that existed in previous publications but have been removed from the most recent selected publication.

    Subcontractors: By default, this report includes all subcontractors within your dataset. You have the option to select specific Task Owners for your analysis.

  • Task Owners: By default, this report includes all task owners within your dataset. You have the option to select specific Task Owners for your analysis.

  • Packages: By default, this report includes all Packages within your dataset. You have the option to select specific Packages for your analysis.

  • Folder Code (tree): By default, this report includes all Folder Codes within your dataset. You have the option to select specific Folder Codes for your analysis.

  • Planned Tasks: The number of tasks planned to be worked on per day from the prior selected publication
  • Actual Tasks: The number of tasks that happened per day in the latest selected publication

  • The X-Axis displays dates in the selected range, as well as the Task Owners/Subcontractors/Packages working on each day

    Top Overdue Category: This identifies the blocker category with the highest number of overdue blockers for the selected publication. The data is filtered to show overdue blockers, grouped by category.

  • Average Days Overdue: This metric calculates the average number of days that overdue blockers have been outstanding within the selected publication, allowing for assessment of the severity of delays.

  • Top Overdue Blocker: This identifies the specific blocker that has the highest average number of overdue days for the selected publication, highlighting the most pressing issues.

  • Group Blockers By: Select how to group the information displayed in the graph - by Category, Owner, or Subcontractor. The Y-axis reflects the count of distinct blocker names based on the selected status and date range, while the X-axis displays your chosen grouping option.

  • Blocker Category: This selector allows you to focus on one category at a time. The default setting is "All Categories." When a specific category is selected, the report filters to display data exclusively related to blockers within that category.

  • Blocker Status: Use this feature to select between Open, Overdue, Resolved, or All Blockers to dynamically update the information displayed in the accompanying graph. The default setting is Overdue.

  • Folder Code: Filter to view blockers on tasks within a specific WBS (Folder) in the included publications. By default, all blockers will be displayed.

  • Task Owner: Filter to view blockers on tasks owned by a specific user. By default, all blockers will be displayed.

  • Packages: Filter to view blockers on tasks within a specific package. By default, all blockers will be displayed.

  • Subcontractors: Filter to view blockers on tasks assigned to a specific Subcontractor. By default, all blockers will be displayed

  • Resource Types: This displays the titles of materials within your Aphex project, helping you easily identify the resources in use.

  • Subcontractors: Filter to view materials on tasks assigned to a specific subcontractor. By default, all materials are displayed

  • Folder Code (tree): Filter to view materials on tasks within a specific folder. By default, all materials are displayed

  • Packages: Filter to view materials on tasks assigned to a specific package. By default, all materials are displayed

  • Task Owners: Filter to view materials on tasks owned by a specific user. By default, all materials are displayed

  • Subcontractors: Filter to view labour & plant on tasks assigned to a specific subcontractor. By default, all resources are displayed

  • Packages: Filter to view labour & plant on tasks assigned to a specific package. By default, all resources are displayed

  • Task Owners: Filter to view labour & plant on tasks owned by a specific user. By default, all resources are displayed

  • Folder Code (tree): Filter to view labour & plant on tasks assigned to a specific folder. By default, all resources are displayed

  • Project Reporting Suite Template
    Percent Plan Complete Dashboard Template
    How is PPC Calculated
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Highways Weekly Dashboard Template
    How is PPC Calculated
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Highways Weekly Dashboard Template
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Publications Summary Dashboard Template
    Blockers
    Clshes & Work Area
    Readying & Reviewing Plans
    Missing Fields
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Plan Comparison Dashboard Template
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Material Resource Dashboard Template
    Project Reporting Suite Template
    Labour & Plant Resource Dashboard Template